MOUT ACTD

Transcription

MOUT ACTD

OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.
MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKS
FOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
Ω
OMEGA Training Group, Inc.
MOUT ACTD
MOUT ACTD PROGRAM
HANDBOOK #3
AND INDIVIDUAL LEADER TASKS
FOR THE INFANTRYMAN
IN URBAN COMBAT
SUBMITTED TO:
U.S. ARMY
Distribution authorized to Department of Defense (DOD) and DOD contractors only.
Reason: To protect technical or operational data or information. Other requests for this
document shall be referred to Project Manager
Destruction Notice: Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or
reconstruction of this document.
NOTE: THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT OFFICIAL US ARMY DOCTRINE.
IT IS A TRAINING PRODUCT FOR EXPERIMENTAL PURPOSES ONLY.
1 APRIL 1999
Copyright  1999
-UNPUBLISHED WORKThis material may be reproduced by or for the U.S. Government pursuant to the Copyright License under
the clause at DFARS 252.227.7013
(OCT 1988)
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
ii
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this introduction is to provide a brief background explanation of
the front-end analysis process. This process has led to writing of this handbook of
proposed individual tasks for urban combat. This introduction also explains the
technology insertion aspects of this document and the format. This document is for use
as a training product for the Military Operations on Urban Terrain Advanced
Concept Technology Demonstration (MOUT ACTD) experimentation only. These
proposed tasks are not meant to replace anything in the Soldier’s Manuals but to augment
it with specific information for urban combat.
The individual tasks presented in this document are a result of a review of the
current Soldier’s Manuals and the most recent versions of MOUT ACTD Handbook #1,
Experimental Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Infantry Platoon and Squad in
Urban Combat and MOUT ACTD Handbook #2, Experimental Collective Tasks for the
Infantry Platoon and Squad in Urban Combat. These MOUT-specific individual and
individual leader tasks for Skill Levels 1-4 and MQS, support each of those documents.
Initial research was accomplished to ascertain which individual tasks and individual
leader tasks were currently available in doctrinal publications and what they included. A
draft list of proposed tasks was prepared based upon this initial research. As new
T&EOs were prepared for Handbook #2 and Handbook #1 was written, these documents
were meticulously combed for individual tasks that had not been developed anywhere or
that needed to be revised. These tasks were refined and edited into the tasks that are
proposed. This draft only addresses individual and leader tasks to be revised or added
for use during combat in urban areas. Additionally, this product has taken into account
the customer feedback received and the technology insertion information received from
Army Experiments #1 through #5 and from USMC Experiments #1 through #3. Army
Experiment #6 and USMC Experiment #4 technology information has been incorporated
in this document where appropriate.
This document is designed to be a reference/resource for baseline MOUT
information for the MOUT ACTD experimentation for Army Experiment #6,
where it is envisioned that this technology will have military utility.
A description of the information provided for each technology selected previously
or proposed for Army Experiment #6 is included at Appendix A. Note that all
appendices are provided under separate cover and are not included in the basic document.
This information provided for each technology was the basis for inclusion throughout this
text. The format we used to distinguish the addition of technology insertion information
to separate it from base line doctrine and TTP was to place a text box with the
information in the appropriate paragraph throughout the document.
iii
EXAMPLE:
R-8, Remote Marking Munitions: Remote marking munitions (shotgun
and M203) could be used to mark known or suspected enemy sniper
positions/locations.
The results of the technology selections from the experimentation to date are also
listed at Appendix A along with a list of sample technology insertions.
A list of the technology insertions by page number in this document is located at
Appendix B.
Writing these individual task summaries is an on-going process. There will be
several iterations. The paper/electronic files are numbered by version. Version 7 is this
handbook, produced for Army Experiment #6 after including observations from Army
Experiments #1 through #5 and the technology insertions for Army Experiment #6. This
document will be adjusted for each experiment based on:
a. The feedback from the soldiers conducting the experiment.
b. The feedback from the customers (DBBL, DOT, CATD).
c. The observations of the OMEGA personnel in the field observing the
experiments. These observations are included in bullet format at Appendix C.
This document has been closely coordinated with the Omega Training Group
personnel writing similar training products for the Marine Warfighting Lab at
Camp Lejeune, so the experimental doctrine/TTPs included are suitable for Joint
Operations with the Marine Corps.
iv
CONTENTS
PAGE
INTRODUCTION
......................................................................................................iii
PREFACE
......................................................................................................xiii
MOS SKILL LEVEL TASKS
Section I. Skill Level 1
TASK #
TASK NAME
The following developed tasks have been deleted from current SQT manuals but are still
applicable to MOUT and have been modified as applicable:
071-070-0003
071-070-0005
071-070-0006
071-070-0008
071-318-2202
071-318-2203
071-318-2210
071-318-2211
Load an M202A1 Multishot Rocket Launcher and
Prepare the Weapon for Carrying..............................................I-3
Perform Misfire Procedures on an M202A1
Multishot Rocket Launcher.......................................................I-9
Prepare an M202A1 Multishot Rocket Launcher
for Firing....................................................................................I-16
Engage Targets with an M202A1 Multishot
Rocket Launcher .......................................................................I-22
Engage Targets with an M72A2 Light Antitank Weapon.........I-41
Perform Misfire Procedures on an M72A2 Light
Antitank Weapon.......................................................................I-49
Prepare an M72A2 Light Antitank Weapon for Firing.............I-53
Restore an M72A2 Light Antitank Weapon to
Carrying Configuration.............................................................I-59
The following tasks for a weapon currently in the inventory (RAAWS, the Ranger
Antiarmor Weapons System) have never been developed for SQT manuals but are
applicable to MOUT and have been modified as applicable:
071-SL1-XX20
071-SL1-XX21
071-SL1-XX22
071-SL1-XX23
Load an 84-mm Ranger Antiarmor Weapons System...............I-66
Prepare an 84-mm Ranger Antiarmor Weapons System
for Firing....................................................................................I-74
Engage Targets with an 84-mm Ranger Antiarmor Weapons
System.......................................................................................I-85
Perform Misfire Procedures on an 84-mm Ranger Antiarmor
Weapons System.......................................................................I-95
v
Section I. Skill Level 1 (continued)
TASK #
TASK NAME
The following tasks applicable to MOUT are developed in SQT manuals but have been
modified as applicable:
071-326-0541
071-326-0550
071-326-0557
Perform Movement Techniques in an Urban Environment ...... I-99
Prepare Positions for Individual and Crew-Served Weapons
in an Urban Environment ..........................................................I-114
Select Hasty Firing Positions in an Urban Environment...........I-128
The following MOUT-specific tasks are not developed in SQT manuals:
071-SL1-XXX1
071-SL1-XXX2
071-SL1-XXX3
071-SL1-XXX4
071-SL1-XXX6
071-SL1-XXX7
071-SL1-XXX8
071-SL1-XXX9
Execute Ballistic Breach...........................................................I-134
Employ Grenades in an Urban Environment ............................I-141
Use Nonverbal Communications Techniques in an Urban
Environment..............................................................................I-154
Engage Targets in an Urban Environment Using Reflexive
Firing Techniques......................................................................I-159
Utilize the Hydra-Ram Hydraulic Breaching Device ...............I-167
Utilize a Rifle Launched Entry Munition
for Breaching Windows, Doors, and Walls.............................I-171
Execute a Mechanical Breach...................................................I-180
React to Grenades in an Urban Environment ............................I-189
The following task is important in MOUT but cannot be developed until a specific
respirator is decided upon for use:
071-SL1-XXX5
Utilize a Respirator....................................................................I-194
Section II. Skill Level 2
The following tasks are not developed in SQT manuals:
071-SL2-XXX2
071-SL2-XXX3
Control Movement of a Fire Team in a Building......................II-3
Control Movement of a Fire Team in a Subterranean
Passageway in an Urban Environment......................................II-9
vi
Section II. Skill Level 2 (continued)
TASK #
TASK NAME
071-SL2-XXX4
071-SL2-XXX5
Conduct a Breach of a Room....................................................II-20
Construct, Emplace, and Detonate a
Flexible Linear Charge ..............................................................II-24
General Purpose Charge ............................................................II-30
Silhouette Charge ......................................................................II-35
Rubber Strip Charge ..................................................................II-39
Chain Link Ladder Charge ........................................................II-43
Doughnut Charge ......................................................................II-47
Wall Breach Charge ..................................................................II-51
Rebar Charge .............................................................................II-55
Shooting Hole Charge ...............................................................II-59
Brashier Breach Charge ............................................................II-63
Construct, Emp lace, and Detonate a
Water Impulse Charge...............................................................II-69
Construct, Emplace, and Detonate, and Employ a
Molotov Cocktail.......................................................................II-73
Bunker Bomb ............................................................................II-76
071-SL2-XXX6
071-SL2-XXX7
071-SL2-XXX8
071-SL2-XXX9
071-SL2-XX10
071-SL2-XX11
071-SL2-XX12
071-SL2-XX13
071-SL2-XX14
071-SL2-XX15
071-SL2-XX16
071-SL2-XX17
The following tasks are applicable to MOUT and are developed in Engineer SQT
manuals. They should be considered for inclusion in Infantry SQT manuals for Skill
Level 2. They have been modified as applicable:
051-193-1007
051-193-1103
051-193-1055
051-193-1202
Prime Explosives with Detonating Cord...................................II-79
Prime Explosives Using Modernized Demolition
Initiators (MDI).........................................................................II-87
Construct a Nonelectric Initiating Assembly with Modernized
Demolition Initiators (MDI)......................................................II-90
Construct a Dual-Firing System with Modernized Demolition
Initiators (MDI).........................................................................II-94
vii
Section III. Skill Level 3
071-SL3-XXX1
071-SL3-XXX2
071-SL3-XXX3
071-SL3-XXX4
071-SL3-XXX5
071-SL3-XXX6
071-SL3-XXX8
Conduct Entry to a Building.................................................... III-3
Conduct Clearing of a Room................................................... III-10
Conduct Movement Through a Hallway
or Subterranean Passageway................................................... III-16
Conduct Clearing of a Staircase.............................................. III-27
Designate Primary, Alternate, and Supplementary Positions
for Key Weapons in an Urban Environment ........................... III-32
Control Unit Movement in an Urban Environment ................ III-37
Control Actions of Squad Under Sniper Fire
in an Urban Environment ........................................................ III-45
Section IV. Skill Level 4
071-SL4-XXX1
Control Support Element for Clearing a Building................... IV-3
Section V. MQS TASKS
The following tasks applicable to MOUT are developed in MQS manuals:
04.3312.02-0011
04.3312.02-0012
Conduct Clearing of a Building (PLT).................................... V-3
Conduct Defense in a Built up Area (PLT)............................. V-9
The following tasks are not developed in MQS manuals:
MQS-XXX1
MQS-XXX2
MQS-XXX3
Maintain Communications in an Urban Environment .............V-16
Conduct Subterranean Operations in an Urban Environment ...V-19
Control Actions of Platoon Under Sniper Fire in an
Urban Environment...................................................................V-23
viii
Section VI. EXPERIMENTAL TASKS
The following Skill Level 1 tasks applicable to Army Experiment #6 are not developed in
SQT manuals since they apply solely to the technologies for the Experiment. After
gathering more information during the Experiment, they will be refined and inserted with
the other Skill Level 1 tasks in this manual after down-selection.
R3: NLOS Radio
113-SL1-XX10D
113-SL1-XX11D
Prepare a Motorola Talkabout Radio for Operations in Urban
Terrain....................................................................................VI-3
Operate a Motorola Talkabout Radio for Operations in Urban
Terrain....................................................................................VI-12
R8: Remote Marking
071-SL1-XX20
Use an Under-barrel Paintball Marker.................................... VI-17
R21: Improved Sling
071-SL1-XX15C
Mount a Hands-free Weapons Sling........................................ VI-19
The following Skill Level 2 tasks applicable to Army Experiment #6 are not developed in
SQT manuals since they apply solely to the technologies for the Experiment. After
gathering more information during the Experiment, they will be refined and inserted with
the other Skill Level 2 tasks in this manual after down-selection.
R5: Intelligence Collection
071-SL2-XX18A
Direct Tactical Employment of an Urbie Unmanned Ground
Vehicle in Urban Terrain......................................................... VI-21
071-SL2-XX18B
Direct Tactical Employment of a Sam Unmanned Ground
071-SL2-XX18C
Direct Tactical Employment of a Lemming Unmanned Ground
071-SL2-XX18D
Direct Tactical Employment of a Matilda Unmanned Ground
R27: Blow Man-sized Hole
051-SL2-XX19A
Employ the Beast to Create a Man-Sized Hole....................... VI-48
051-SL2-XX19C
Employ the Explosive Cutting Tape
to Create a Man-Sized Hole .................................................... VI-51
ix
The following MQS task applicable to Army Experiment #6 is not developed in MQS
manuals since it applies solely to the technologies for the Experiment. After gathering
more information during the Experiment, it will be refined and inserted with the other
MQS tasks in this manual after down-selection.
R5: Intelligence Collection
MQS-XXX5
Conduct Reconnaissance of a Zone, Area, or Route............VI-56
x
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP APPENDICES
TO THE HANDBOOKS
The following appendices are designed to provide further explanation to the MOUT
ACTD handbooks for experimentation purposes only. They are not designed to be part
of any manual on individual tasks. They are published separately from this handbook
since they are applicable to all the handbooks.
Appendix A
MOUT ACTD Technologies
Results of Technology Experimentation
Sample Technology Insertions..................................................A-1
Appendix B
List of Technology Insertions in the Handbooks ......................B-1
Appendix C
Omega Training Group TTP Observations Through
Army Experiment #5.................................................................C-1
xi
xii
PREFACE
This publication is for skill levels 1 through 4 soldiers holding MOS 11 and their
trainer or first-line supervisor. It contains standardized training objectives, in the form
of task summaries, to train and evaluate infantry soldiers on individual tasks that support
unit missions during urban combat.
The individual tasks for the M202 FLASH and the M72 LAW have been included
even though most Army units do not have ready access to these weapons and these tasks
have been deleted from current Soldier’s Manuals. They still exist in war stocks and the
US Navy is still actively procuring the M72 LAW. The M72 LAW appears to be a
much more versatile and effective weapon in urban combat than the weapons that
replaced it, which had the “Fulda Gap” battle in mind. The M202 FLASH has no
replacement in the active inventory but flame weapons have historically been very useful
in urban terrain.
Similarly, tasks for the RAAWS (Ranger Antiarmor Weapons System, the Carl
Gustav) have been included even though this weapon has not been fielded to most
infantry units. It is in the inventory, is useful in urban combat, and may be available in
the theater of operations.
One of the proposed tasks at the Skill Level 1 level is “Use a Respirator”. We
believe that having respirators available for use in underground passageways will allow
survival and mission success despite situations that might involve a lack of oxygen. We
have listed this task, even though we have not developed it because of lack of specific
equipment to work with. Similarly, we believe that there is a need for a small (5minute) breathing apparatus for use by building defenders. The need for this arises from
the very great potential of fire and smoke in a building under weapons fire.
Section VI of this Handbook includes tasks that are specific to new technologies
that are to be experimented with during Army Experiment #6. Those technologies
selected for use after the experiment will be placed in the appropriate skill level in the
next version of this handbook. Observations made during Army experiment #6 on the
use of these technologies will be used to update these tasks as necessary.
xiii
xiv
SECTION I
SKILL LEVEL 1
I-1
I-2
071-070-0003
TC 23-2 (1998)
LOAD THE M202A1 MULTISHOT ROCKET LAUNCHER AND
PREPARE THE WEAPON FOR CARRYING
071-070-0003
CONDITIONS
Given an M202A1 rocket launcher, and M74 incendiary rocket clip.
STANDARDS
Load the M202A1 rocket launcher and prepare the weapon for carrying within 3 minutes.
TRAINING AND EVALUATION
Training Information Outline
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows and
knees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged to
wear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTION
Prolonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before entering and clearing buildings,
squad members should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts and
abrasions.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series,
M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weapon
and still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
1. Place the trigger safety in the SAFE position (Figure 1).
________________________________________________________________
I-3
TC 23-2 (1998)
071-070-0003
1. Trigger
2. Trigger-handle lock
3. Trigger safety button
(SAFE position)
4. Trigger-handle release button
Figure 1. Placing Safety In The SAFE Position.
2. Inspect the launcher for damage.
a. Inspect the interior of the launch tubes for dents and cracks; raveled, frayed, or
loose fiberglass; or visible signs of burns in any tube.
b. Check for sand, dirt, or foreign matter that could damage the rocket warhead
when fired.
3. Position the launcher on the ground resting on its closed front cover with the front cover
handle in the stowed position (Figure 2).
________________________________________________________________
I-4
071-070-0003
TC 23-2 (1998)
Figure 2. M202A1 Rocket Launcher with Sling.
4. Open the rear cover by releasing the rear cover latch and rotate it down and beneath the
launcher (Figure 2).
5. Grasp end of clip support strap nearest two black snaps and pull it outward to remove the
strap and spacers from the clip (Figure 3).
________________________________________________________________
I-5
TC 23-2 (1998)
071-070-0003
1. Rocket
2. Snap
3. Strap
4. Tube
5. Rocket retainer
6. Clip latch (secure position)
7. Bail handle (extended position)
8. Rocket motor igniter
9. Manifold
10. Clip support assembly
11. Plastic separator
Figure 3. M74 Rocket Clip.
6. After removal of support strap, depress the launcher clip lock button (Figure 3). This will
allow you to fully insert the rocket clip into the launcher. You should hear a “click” as the clip
latch locks onto the firing pin assembly. If not, press firmly on the rear of the rocket clip; the
clip latch should lock onto the firing pin assembly. To check, pull outward on the bail. If the
firing pin assembly remains attached to the clip latch manifold, the firing pin assembly is locked
in position.)
7. Support the launcher with the left hand on the sight and partially insert the rocket clip into
the rear of the launcher tubes (bail handle down) using the rocket warheads as guides (Figure
4).
________________________________________________________________
I-6
071-070-0003
TC 23-2 (1998)
Figure 4. Loading The Clip In The Launcher.
WARNING
Before loading the M74 rocket clip, inspect for defects such as leaking
rockets, loose warheads, bail not under spring tension, dented rocket
canister, rust or corrosion, or other foreign matter such as sand or dirt.
Ensure the clip latch is present and each rocket has a retainer. If the clip
latch is missing from the clip manifold, a spare latch is stored in the rear
cover of the launcher.
8. Manually or visually check to ensure that the prongs of the clip latch are fully seated in the
clip attachment slot of the firing pin mechanism assembly (Figure 3).
9. Close and latch the rear cover of the launcher.
10. Adjust sling and place loaded launcher on shoulder.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide the soldier with an inert M74 incendiary rocket clip.
________________________________________________________________
I-7
TC 23-2 (1998)
071-070-0003
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that he will load the M202A1 rocket launcher and return the
launcher to the carrying configuration.
Performance Measures
Results
1. Places trigger safety in the SAFE position.
P
F
2. Positions launcher on the ground, resting on its closed front cover
and front cover handle in the stowed position.
P
F
3. Opens the rear dust cover.
P
F
4. Partially inserts the rocket clip into the launcher and removes the
support strap.
P
F
5. Depresses the launcher clip lock button and fully inserts the rocket clip.
P
F
6. Grasps the bail handle and pulls the rocket the clip out until locked into
position.
P
F
7. Releases the bail handle.
P
F
FEEDBACK
Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed.
If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCES
Required
TC 23-2
Related
FM 90-10-1
FM 7-8
FM 7-7J
________________________________________________________________
I-8
071-318-2202
STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
PERFORM MISFIRE PROCEDURES ON A M202A1 MULTISHOT
ROCKET LAUNCHER
071-070-0005
CONDITIONS
Given an M202A1 rocket launcher, with loaded M74 rocket clip that has a simulated misfire in
training area.
STANDARDS
Perform the following actions in sequence:
a. Squeeze the trigger four times after the last misfired rocket.
b. Place the trigger safety in SAFE position.
c. Remove the clip latch.
d. Remove the rocket clip.
e. Place the rocket clip on the ground in a designated area that is approximately 60
meters away.
________________________________________________________________
I-9
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2202
CAUTION
abrasions.
1. MISFIRE: A failure to fire may be caused by a faulty firing mechanism or a faulty element
in the propelling charge explosive train.
CAUTION
Do not assume that an initial failure of a round to fire is a complete misfire - it
could be a hangfire or a mechanical delay. However, the misfire procedures
outlined below are appropriate for either a complete misfire or a hangfire.
a. In COMBAT:
•
•
•
Squeeze the trigger four times after the last misfired rocket. If this clears the
weapon, remove the empty clip and inspect the launcher before firing again.
If this does not clear the weapon, place the trigger safety in the SAFE position,
keeping the weapon pointed toward the enemy, lower it from your shoulder and
place it on the ground, resting on the front and rear dust covers.
Grasp the side of one clip tube and remove the clip latch to separate the firing pin
mechanism from the clip. If separation does not occur, carefully insert a knife
________________________________________________________________
I-10
071-318-2202
STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
blade between the firing pin mechanism and clip manifold and apply pressure to
obtain at least a 1-inch separation between the two.
•
Depress the clip lock button, grasp either of the top two rocket tubes, and remove
the clip.
CAUTION
Failure to depress the clip lock button will cause damage to the launcher.
•
Place the rocket clip on the ground as far away from your position as practical (60
meters desirable). Follow unit commander’s SOP for disposal of the rocket clip.
•
Inspect the launcher prior to loading again.
b. In a TRAINING environment:
•
Shout “MISFIRE” to warn all personnel that you have a misfire. Keep the
launcher pointed at the target.
•
Squeeze the trigger four times after the last misfired rocket. If this clears the
weapon, remove the empty clip and inspect the launcher before firing again.
•
If this does not clear the weapon, place the trigger safety in the SAFE position and
keep the weapon on your shoulder pointed down range for 1 minute.
•
Keeping the weapon pointed down range, lower it from your shoulder and place it
on a firm surface resting on the front and rear dust cover.
•
Grasp the side of one clip tube and remove the clip latch to separate the firing pin
mechanism from the clip. If the separation does not occur, carefully insert knife
blade between the firing pin mechanism and clip manifold and apply pressure to
obtain at least a 1-inch separation between the two.
•
Depress the clip button, grasp either of the top two rocket tubes, and remove the
clip.
CAUTION
Failure to depress the clip lock button will cause damage to the launcher.
________________________________________________________________
I-11
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2202
•
Dispose of the rocket clip in accordance with your installation/unit SOP, AR 75-1,
and TM 3-1055-456-12.
•
Inspect the launcher prior to reloading.
2. LEAKING ROCKET: A leaking rocket is characterized by burning fuel coming out of the
rocket warhead. This can happen in three different situations.
a. Before loading the rocket clip - place the rocket clip on the ground and immediately
take cover at least 60 meters from the rocket clip. Do not move in front or to the rear of the
rocket clip. Wait until the rocket clip stops burning before returning to the launcher.
b. While loaded in the launcher without the clip being extended - place the launcher on
the ground. Evacuate the area at least 60 meters and take cover. Do not move in front of the
launcher or into the rear danger-zone area. In case of a fire wait until the rocket clip stops
burning before returning to the launcher.
c. When the rocket is fired - keep the launcher pointed toward the target area and pull
the trigger to clear the weapon. If this clears the weapon and triethylaluminum (TEA) is on the
launcher, place the launcher on the ground, immediately take cover at least 60 meters from the
rocket clip and allow the TEA to burn itself out.
CAUTION
Training Situation: Wait 1 hour before removing the rocket clip and reloading the
launcher. Dispose of damaged rocket clip by unit SOP.
Combat Situation: Wait 1 minute after burnout, remove the rocket clip
and reload the launcher. Dispose of damaged rocket clip by unit SOP.
3. DAMAGED ROCKETS: If in combat, shrapnel or small arms fire damages the rockets,
the following actions should be taken:
a. DEFENSE: Drop the launcher in the fighting position and move to an adjacent
position.
b. OFFENSE: Drop the launcher on the ground and continue the attack.
c. TRAINING: Insure that all personnel take cover as far as possible from the
________________________________________________________________
I-12
071-318-2202
STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
damaged rocket. Let the rocket burn out and then dispose of the unexpended rounds in
accordance with local SOP.
4. SAFETY: Backblast area (figure 1). Propellant gasses escaping to the rear of the
launcher can cause severe injury to personnel and damage to equipment located close to the
firing position. The total backblast area extends 40 meters to the rear with a base of 38
meters.
PATH OF
ROCKET
FRONT OF
LAUNCHER
1 METER
16 METERS
DANGER
ZONE
15 METERS
40 METERS
CAUTION
ZONE
38 METERS
Figure 1. Backblast Area.
a. The danger zone extends 15 meters to the rear with a base of 15 meters. All
personnel, equipment, and flammable materials must be kept clear of this area.
b. The caution zone extends an additional 25 meters with a base of 38 meters.
Personnel in this area could be injured from secondary missiles thrown to the rear by the blast.
c. In a tactical situation, it is unlikely that the backblast area will be completely clear.
Consequently, the launcher may be fired without injury to the firer as long as any rear vertical
________________________________________________________________
I-13
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2202
obstructions are at least 5 meters away from the launcher. Friendly troops
providing security must be protected in a fighting position, behind a solid object, or lying prone
with steel helmets facing the firing position.
5. ADDITIONAL SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS:
a. The firer’s body must be clear of the front and rear of the weapon while firing.
b. Do not engage hard targets less than 20 meters from the firing position.
c. The firer must wear earplugs as well as other troops in the immediate area.
d. The firer should exercise care when firing the launcher near bushes and trees.
Rocket impact with a heavy branch may detonate the rocket warhead.
e. Targets at ranges greater than 200 meters should not be engaged from the prone
firing position. The launcher elevation could cause exhaust gases and material to deflect from
the ground and injure the gunner.
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and inert equipment given in the task conditions
statement.
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that he will conduct combat misfire procedures on the
M202A1rocket launcher, and return the launcher to the carrying configuration.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Squeezes the trigger four times after the last misfired rocket. If this
clears the weapon, removes the empty clip and inspects the launcher
before firing again.
P
F
2. If it does not clear the weapon, places the trigger safety in SAFE
position and, keeping the weapon pointed down range, lowers from the
shoulder and places it on a firm surface, resting it on the front and rear
________________________________________________________________
I-14
071-318-2202
STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
dust covers.
P
F
4. If separation does not occur, carefully inserts a knife blade between
the firing pin mechanism and clip manifold and applies pressure to obtain
at least a 1-inch separation.
P
F
5. Grasps the side of one clip tube and removes the rocket clip.
P
F
6. Places the rocket clip on the ground 50 meters away (distance may
be stated).
P
F
7. Inspects the rocket launcher.
P
F
3. Grasps the side of one clip tube and removes the clip latch to separate
the firing pin mechanism from the clip.
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
TC 23-2
Related
FM 90-10-1
FM 7-8
FM 7-7J
________________________________________________________________
I-15
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2202
PREPARE AN M202A1 MULTISHOT ROCKET LAUNCHER
FOR FIRING
071-070-0006
CONDITIONS
Given a collapsed M202A1 rocket launcher in the carrying configuration, with a full M74
incendiary rocket clip loaded in the launcher, and a firing position.
STANDARDS
Prepare the M202A1 rocket launcher for firing within 1 minute.
CAUTION
abrasions.
M4 , and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hand from the weapon
NOTE: Before firing the launcher, inspect the exterior of the launcher for damage during
movement.
1. Prepare for firing. Open the rear cover, grasp the bail handle, and pull the rocket clip
outward until it is fully extended and locked into position (you should hear a “click” indicating
that the rocket clip is locked). Then release the bail handle, ensuring that it folds against the
rear edge of the clip in the downward position (Figure 1).
________________________________________________________________
I-16
071-318-2202
STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
Figure 1. Preparing The Weapon For Firing.
2. Position the weapon on the right shoulder so that the rear cover acts as a shoulder rest in
front of the right shoulder (Figure 2).
________________________________________________________________
I-17
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2202
Figure 2. Locking Front Cover Into Position.
3. Place the right hand under the launcher to support it, while using the left hand to unlatch the
front cover and rotate the handle outward until it stops.
4. Rotate the front cover down until it locks into position. This action releases the trigger
handle assembly that is located beneath the launcher.
a. If the trigger handle assembly does not extend, pull it downward until it locks into
position.
b. The front dust cover must be held in the open position.
c. DO NOT attempt to pull trigger handle assembly down if front dust cover is not
locked in the open position. To do so will prevent the dust cover from locking in the open
________________________________________________________________
I-18
071-318-2202
STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
position which will prevent the weapon from firing.
5. With thumb and forefinger, grasp the trigger-handle assembly immediately behind the
locked front cover. Extend the trigger-handle, ensuring it is fully seated in the firing position
and the safety switch is in the SAFE position.
6. Check the backblast area.
WARNING
Check the area to the rear of the launcher to ensure that all personnel,
material, and obstructions that would interfere or present a safety
hazard are clear of the rear danger zone.
7. Extend the sight by depressing the sight lock, and moving it to the rear detent position.
8. Raise the protective lens cover and the launcher is ready to fire (Figure 3).
Figure 3. Launcher Ready To Fire.
NOTE: If all rockets are not fired, or none are fired, take the following steps when keeping
the weapon loaded:
________________________________________________________________
I-19
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2202
a. Position trigger safety switch on SAFE.
b. Close sight cover, position sight lock in forward detent, and fold sight assembly in
against the launcher.
c. Press trigger release button unlocking the trigger handle and rotate it upward,
engaging the interlock and releasing the front cover.
d. Close and latch front cover.
e. Place your left hand under the launcher and your right hand around the lower right
clip tube and lift the launcher from your shoulder. Position it on the ground resting on the front
cover.
f. Depress clip lock button and push on the rear of clip assembly, retracting the clip
into the launcher. Before closing and latching the rear cover, perform a visual and/or manual
check of clip latch, insuring it is firmly engaged in the clip attachment slot of the firing pin
mechanism assembly.
g. Adjust sling and place loaded launcher on shoulder.
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditions
statement. An inert M74 clip may be used during the evaluation.
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that he will prepare the M202A1 launcher for firing and return
the launcher to the carrying configuration.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Places launcher on shoulder, unlatches the front cover, and locks it into
position.
P
F
2. Extends trigger handle ensuring it is fully seated in the firing position.
P
F
Results
3. Assumes the standing firing position.
P
F
________________________________________________________________
I-20
071-318-2202
STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
4. Checks backblast area.
P
F
5. Extends sight to rear detent position and raises protective lens cover.
P
F
6. Takes weapon off safe.
P
F
7. Prepares launcher for carrying configuration when no rocket was fired
or only one rocket was fired.
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
TC 23-2
Related
FM 90-10-1
FM 7-8
FM 7-7J
________________________________________________________________
I-21
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2202
ENGAGE TARGETS WITH AN M202A1
MULTISHOT ROCKET LAUNCHER
071-070-0008
CONDITIONS
Given an M202A1 rocket launcher with a full M74 incendiary rocket clip loaded in the launcher
and targets suitable for engagement (bunkers, armored vehicles, etc.) with a flame weapon.
Given a firing position, with specific Rules of engagement (ROE).
STANDARDS
Engage leader designated targets in a MOUT environment from the standing, kneeling, and
prone positions, achieving three target hits in four firings.
CAUTION
abrasions.
1. Selecting Firing positions. The M202A1 rocket launcher is fired in the standing, kneeling,
or prone position. You must ensure that the position selected is stable, comfortable, and most
suitable for engaging the target.
NOTE: The M202A1 rocket launcher sight is fixed on the right side of the weapon for RIGHT
________________________________________________________________
I-22
071-318-2202
STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
handed firing. The gunner can operate and fire the weapon from the LEFT shoulder
when not using the sight.
a. Standing unsupported position: Face the target and execute a half right face.
Spread the feet a comfortable distance apart and place the weapon on the right shoulder. The
left hand is placed on the front cover handle or under the trigger handle assembly of the
launcher. The right shoulder is placed against the rear cover and launcher for stability. The left
hand is used to further steady the weapon by grasping the front cover handle and applying a
steady rearward pressure as shown (Figure 1).
________________________________________________________________
I-23
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2202
Figure 1. Standing Unsupported Position.
b. Standing supported position: The standing supported position is designed to make
use of any cover the gunner might find and to aid in stabilizing the weapon for more accurate
firing. The left shoulder, forearm, thigh, and knee should rest against the selected cover.
The left knee is flexed and the right leg straight. The gunner should check to ensure that the
sights are not blocked by the selected support as shown (Figure 2).
________________________________________________________________
I-24
071-318-2202
STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
Figure 2. Standing Supported Position Using A Corner Wall.
c. The gunner may choose to fire over his cover in the standing position. A great deal
of support can be obtained from a fallen tree, berm, fence, or a wall. To fire over his cover
the gunner would use the position as shown (Figure 3). The left hand would be on the handle
on the front dust cover with only his index finger through the hole in the handle. The remaining
fingers should form a fist and the bottom of the fist should rest on the cover. The feet should be
spread a comfortable distance apart.
________________________________________________________________
I-25
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2202
Figure 3. Standing Supported Position (Over Cover).
d. Kneeling unsupported position: Kneel on the right knee with the right thigh at a 90
degree angle with the line of aim and sit back on the right heel, shifting the weight forward to a
comfortable position. As viewed from the front, the lower left leg is vertical. Place the
launcher on the right shoulder, keeping the rear cover forward of the right shoulder. Rest the
upper left arm forward of the left knee, with the left hand on the front cover handle. Place the
right arm against the side, right hand on the trigger assembly as shown (Figure 4). This
position is more suitable for tracking and engaging moving targets.
________________________________________________________________
I-26
071-318-2202
STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
Figure 4. Kneeling Unsupported Position.
e. Kneeling supported position: To engage stationary targets and to fire around cover
the gunner would use the position shown (Figures 5 and 6). Lean the left shoulder, upper arm,
and thigh against the support. Sit back on the right heel. The left elbow should rest on the
upper portion of the left leg, near the knee. The left hand can be moved to support underneath
the right hand for long-range targets. The gunner should not bring the front of the launcher too
close to the support or his sight will be blocked.
________________________________________________________________
I-27
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
Figure 5. Kneeling Supported
Position (Side View).
071-318-2202
Figure 6. Kneeling Supported
Position (Front View).
To fire over cover, use the kneeling supported position as shown (Figures 7 and 8). The
gunners’ elbows are on the cover for support. Kneel on both knees.
________________________________________________________________
I-28
071-318-2202
STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
Figure 7. Kneeling Supported Position Over Cover (Side View).
Figure 8. Kneeling Supported Position Over Cover (Front View).
________________________________________________________________
I-29
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2202
f. Prone Position: This position (Figure 9) is the most stable of the three positions; its
use is limited to a maximum range of 200 meters.
WARNING
To engage a target beyond 200 meters requires elevating the front of the
launcher; that may cause injury from the backblast.
To get into this position, lie down at an angle of not less than 45 degrees to the line of fire in
order to keep clear of the backblast area. The back should be straight and the right leg directly
on line running through the right hip and right shoulder (if possible). Position the elbows well
under the launcher in a comfortable position. Ensure the legs DO NOT extend into the
backblast area. The front dust cover or left wrist can rest on the ground for support. This
position should not be used unless it is absolutely necessary.
Figure 9. The Prone Position.
________________________________________________________________
I-30
071-318-2202
STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
2. Check the backblast area.
WARNING
Check the area to the rear of the launcher to ensure that all personnel,
material, and obstructions that would interfere or present a safety
hazard are clear of the rear danger zone.
3. Sighting equipment and aiming:
a. Reflecting sight assembly (Figure 10). The sight is boresighted at the factory and
by organizational maintenance personnel as necessary.
1. Mounting plate
2. Elevating adjustment plate
3. Sight mounting housing
4. Curved washer
5. Stop screw
6. Stop screw nut
7. Hinge stud nut
8. Lens cover
9. Reflecting sight
10. Hinge stud
11. Sight lock (firing position
12. Elevation plate screws
13. Sight alignment marks
14. Screwdriver slot
15. Indicator mark
Figure 10. M202A1 Sight.
b. Sight. The reflecting sight has a ladder-type reticle pattern (Figure 11) with curved
________________________________________________________________
I-31
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2202
stadia lines on both sides of the vertical centerline.
Figure 11. Sight And Center Vertical Line.
4. Engage stationary, area, and moving targets:
a. Stationary aiming points (Figures 12 and 13). The center of visible mass is the
aiming point for point-type stationary targets such as vehicles or bunkers. A proper sight
picture is obtained by centering the target within the sight reticle at the appropriate range.
________________________________________________________________
I-32
071-318-2202
STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
Figure 12. Aiming Point For Point-Type Stationary Target.
Figure 13. Sight Picture.
b. Moving targets. When engaging moving targets use the reticle lead lines. Each
lead line or space represents 8 kph (5 mph) of apparent speed. Lead is applied to targets
moving across the gunner’s front.
________________________________________________________________
I-33
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2202
c. Targets moving directly across the gunner’s front. Estimate the target’s speed as
either slow (8 kph or less) or fast (9 kph or more) (Figures 14 and 15).
Figure 14. Target Moving Across
Gunner’s Front (Slow Target).
Figure 15. Target Moving Across
Gunner’s Front (Fast Target).
•
For slow moving targets, locate the proper range mark on the vertical rangeline,
locate the lead line which is horizontal to the range mark, place one lead line
distance on center of mass of the target and fire.
•
For fast moving targets, use the same procedures as for slow targets except that
the lead line is placed on the front leading edge of the target. Be sure to select the
left or right lead line that places the vertical centerline in front of the target.
•
When engaging targets at an angle, such as a vehicle, and more of the target is
visible than its front or rear, engage the target as if it were moving directly across
the front. The fast or slow speed determination will be based upon the target’s
speed straight across your line of fire. If more of the front or rear is visible engage
the target as if it were a slow target moving directly across your front (Figures 16
and 17).
Figure 16. Target Moving At An Angle Figure 17. Target Moving At An Angle
Toward Gunner (Slow Target).
Toward Gunner (Fast Target).
5. Range determination. The probability of hitting any target with the M202A1 rocket
launcher is greatly increased if the gunner actually knows the range of the target. Some of the
methods of determining the range to targets are:
________________________________________________________________
I-34
071-318-2202
STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
a. Use of rangefinders.
b. Measuring the distance to the target using a map.
c. Determine intersection-using compasses.
d. Conduct a pace count to target area.
e. Use of direct fire weapons such as machineguns.
f. Conduct visual range estimation. Visual range estimation is the least desirable
method due to its inaccuracy; however, in the offense or in a hasty defense, it may be
necessary to use this method. Therefore, all troops should receive training and frequent
practice in the methods of visual estimation of range. Two methods are:
•
The 100-meter unit-of-measure method.
•
The appearance-of-objects method.
6. Speed determination. Using the lead lines to determine speed, a gunner may tend to
underestimate the vehicle’s speed, but this can be corrected with practice.
7. Special aiming techniques. When firing on targets at 500 meters or less and the first round
misses, the burst on target technique of fire should be used to gain a second round hit. The
M202A1 rocket launcher can be used to suppress enemy troops in fortified positions at ranges
beyond 500 meters and out to 700 meters with smoke and flame. The burst-on-target
technique is very easily applied by following the procedures below:
a. After firing the weapon, hold your original sight picture until the rocket impacts.
b. Note the point on the sight reticle where the round burst appears and move this
point onto the center mass of the target (Figures 18 and 19).
________________________________________________________________
I-35
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
Figure 18. Burst-On-Target
Aiming Technique.
071-318-2202
Figure 19. Center Of Mass Of Target
Aiming Technique.
c. Fire again. This should give you a target hit; if not, apply the same principle and
fire again. The last range adjustment should have you on the target.
8. One method for engaging targets is due to the peculiarity of the weapon. It is possible to
fire the weapon with effects around a corner or behind cover by using a “ricochet” or “splash”
technique.
9. When firing the launcher, use the STEADY HOLD procedures.
a. Assume a good supported position.
b. Don’t breathe during aiming and firing.
c. Relax.
d. Pull the trigger; don’t jerk it.
e. With the left hand, hold the weapon so that the rear dust cover rests snugly against
the shoulder.
10. Trigger manipulation. Use the following procedures for firing the launcher.
a. Release the trigger safety by moving the switch to the rear.
b. Use two fingers and applying a smooth and steady rearward pressure, squeeze the
trigger fully.
c. After each rocket has fired, relax your fingers to allow the trigger to return to the
fully forward position. This method must be repeated to fire each of the rockets. Only one
rocket can be fired with each trigger squeeze (Figure 20).
________________________________________________________________
I-36
071-318-2202
STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
Figure 20. Firing The Weapon.
11. Loaded condition. If all rockets are not fired or none are fired, take the following steps
when keeping the weapon loaded:
a. Position trigger safety switch on SAFE.
b. Close sight cover, position sight lock in forward detent, and fold sight assembly in
against the launcher.
c. Press trigger release button unlocking the trigger handle and rotate it upward,
engaging the interlock and releasing the front cover.
d. Close and latch front cover.
e. Place your left hand under the launcher and your right hand around the lower right
clip tube and lift the launcher from your shoulder. Position it on the ground resting on the front
cover.
f. Depress clip lock button and push on the rear of clip assembly, retracting the clip
into the launcher. Before closing and latching the rear cover, perform a visual and/or manual
check of clip latch, insuring it is firmly engaged in the clip attachment slot of the firing pin
mechanism assembly.
12. Unloading procedures. To unload the launcher, place it on the ground, resting on the
front and rear dust covers. Insure the rear dust cover folds down against the rocket clip for
________________________________________________________________
I-37
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2202
stabilization. Remove the rocket clip latch using the combination tool provided.
a. Depress the clip lock button, grasp one of the top two rocket tubes and remove
rocket clip by pulling rearward (Figures 21 and 22).
Figure 21. Removing clip latch.
Figure 22. Removing the rocket clip.
b. Reinsert the firing pin housing into the launcher by rotating the firing pin housing
slightly so it will slide back into the launcher. Close and lock the rear cover.
13. Reloading. To reload the M202A1 launcher follow the steps outlined in TASK 071SL1-XXX8, load the M74 incendiary rocket clip into the M202A1 rocket launcher and
prepare the weapon for carrying.
statement.
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that he will engage designated targets from the standing,
kneeling, and prone positions, achieving three target hits in four firings.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
________________________________________________________________
I-38
071-318-2202
STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
1. Determines range to target or targets using the football method and maps.
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
2. Demonstrates aiming techniques for stationary and moving targets:
P
F
3. Explains special aiming techniques for engaging targets beyond 500 meters. P
F
a. Places the target square (½ inch x ½ inch) on the sight reticle
drawing (8 inch x 4 inch) for locating a target at a range of 100 meters.
b. Places the target square on the sight reticle drawing to properly
depict the sight picture for a target moving at 15 kph at a range of 400 meters.
6. Engages and hits 3 out 4 selected targets.
7. Prepare launcher for carrying configuration when no rocket was fired
or only one rocket was fired.
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
TC 23-2
Related
FM 90-10-1
FM 7-8
FM 7-7J
________________________________________________________________
I-39
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2202
ENGAGE TARGETS WITH AN M72A2 LIGHT ANTITANK
WEAPON
071-318-2202
CONDITIONS
Given an operational M72A2 light antitank weapon (LAW) and engageable targets.
STANDARDS
Engage and disable or destroy targets within engagement range.
CAUTION
abrasions.
1. Identify targets to engage in the urban terrain.
a. Field fortifications.
b. Light armored and unarmored vehicles.
NOTE: The M72A2 LAW will not penetrate the thickest armor on a tank. Do not fire a
________________________________________________________________
I-40
071-318-2202
STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
frontal shot since a tank's armor is thickest up front.
c. Enemy personnel.
2. Use sights.
a. The rear sight is a flip-up peep sight. Hold the sight as close to the eye as possible
and view the front sight through the peep when aiming.
b. The front sight is a clear plastic flip-up leaf (Figure 1). On the sight, there is a
vertical range line with ranges from 50 to 350 meters indexed in 25-meter increments, two
curved stadia lines (LAW stadia lines are not accurate and are no longer used), and lead
crosses.
3. Estimate range. The first step in target engagement is to determine the range to the target.
This is done by using visual range estimation aided by the use of a range card. (See task 071326-0512, Estimate Range.) A range card is a rough drawing of the terrain in your defensive
sector that shows easily recognized reference points (terrain features or objects) and the
distance to each (paced off or measured when possible). If there are no usable reference
points available, stakes can be erected at known ranges to serve the same purpose.
Figure 1. Front sight.
4. Sight on targets.
a. After determining the range, sight on stationary targets by:
________________________________________________________________
I-41
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2202
(1) Locating the range mark on the vertical range line corresponding to the
estimate range.
(2) Placing that point on the center target mass of a vehicle (Figure 2). If
target is a structure, aim 6 inches below or to the side of a firing aperture (Figure 3). This
enhances the probability of killing the enemy behind the wall. For a sandbagged emplacement,
aim at the center of the firing aperture (Figure 4). Even if the round misses the aperture, the
bunker wall area near it is usually easiest to penetrate.
Figure 2. Center of target mass.
________________________________________________________________
I-42
071-318-2202
STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
Figure 3. Point of aim on a structure.
Figure 4. Point of aim for sandbagged emplacement.
(3) Firing and adjusting, if necessary.
Note: Consider all front/rear views of vehicles as stationary targets, even if moving.
b. After determining the range, sight on moving targets by:
(1) Estimating the target speed as slow or fast (Table 1).
ESTIMATE TARGET SPEED ASSLOW FORA. VEHICLES MOVING 5 MPH (8 KPH) OR LESS.
B. ALL OBLIQUE TARGETS WHERE YOU SEE
MORE OF THE FRONT/REAR THAN THE SIDE.
FAST FOR ALL TARGETS (EXCEPT B ABOVE)
TRAVELING FASTER THAN 5 MPH (8 KMPH).
Table 1. Target speed.
________________________________________________________________
I-43
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2202
(2) Applying the appropriate lead using the lead cross directly opposite the
estimated range.
(a) For slow targets, the lead cross is on the center of mass (Figure
5). The vertical range line is in front of the target.
________________________________________________________________
I-44
071-318-2202
STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
Figure 5. Slow targets.
(b) For fast targets, the lead cross is on the front edge of the target
(Figure 6). The vertical range line is in front of the target.
________________________________________________________________
I-45
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2202
Figure 6. Fast target.
(3) Firing and adjusting, if necessary.
4. Apply trigger squeeze. The trigger for the LAW is unique in that it is a bar on the top of the
launcher. To fire, apply pressure straight down. Apply a steady; smooth squeeze downward
with the fingertips only.
Setup: Provide on a live fire range, a M190 subcaliber device and eight M 73 rockets (four
rounds for the stationary targets and four rounds for the moving target). A series of targets
presenting front, flank, and oblique views between 75 and 200 meters from the firer, and a
moving (4 to 14 mph) targets that will present a flank view between 75 and 165 meters from the
firer.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he will fire four rockets at the stationary target and score at
least two hits. He will then fire four rockets at the moving target and score at least two hits.
He will then fire four rockets at the moving target and score at least two hits. Proper
procedure will be used during the firing.
EVALUATION GUIDE
________________________________________________________________
I-46
071-318-2202
STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
Results
1. Score two hits out of four rounds fired at stationary targets.
P
F
2. Score two hits out of four rounds fired at the moving target.
P
F
3. Observe proper procedures and safety precautions during flight.
P
F
FEEDBACK
If the soldier scores NO-GO, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCES
Required
FM 23-33
TEC Lesson 948-071-0006-F (Revised)
Related
FM 90-10-1
________________________________________________________________
I-47
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2203
PERFORM MISFIRE PROCEDURES ON AN M72A2 LIGHT
ANTITANK WEAPON
071-318-2203
CONDITIONS
Given an M72A2 light antitank weapon (LAW). An attempt to fire the weapon has resulted in
a misfire.
STANDARDS
Perform misfire procedures so that one of the two below is accomplished.
1. The intended target is engaged.
2. The inoperative LAW is properly disposed.
CAUTION
abrasions.
1. Perform immediate action (training only).
a. Resqueeze the trigger bar. If the round does not fire, shout “MISFIRE” and wait
________________________________________________________________
I-48
071-318-2203
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
10 seconds.
b. Place the trigger handle on SAFE while keeping the LAW pointed at the target, then
remove the LAW from your shoulder.
c. Wait 1 minute, depress the detent, and collapse the launcher about 4 inches.
d. Reextend the launcher and place it on your shoulder.
e. Check the backblast area.
f. Arm, aim, and attempt to fire.
g. If the LAW fails to fire after immediate action (training only):
(1) Keep the LAW aimed at the target for 10 seconds.
(2) Place the LAW on SAFE, remove from shoulder, and keep it pointed
down range for 1 additional minute.
(3) Do not collapse the launcher.
(4) Dispose of the launcher as directed by unit SOP.
NOTE: If an M190 subcaliber device (M73) was used in training, an instructor or safety
noncommissioned officer should examine the primer housing lock pin to ensure that
the bent position of the pin is pushing against the primer housing door. This is to be
done after the first 1-minute wait is completed. After the second failure to fire and its
subsequent 1-minute wait, remove the M73 and examine the primer cap. If the
primer cap is dented, a rocket malfunction has occurred; if the primer cap is not
dented, the launcher has malfunctioned.
2. Perform immediate action (combat only).
a. Immediately resqueeze the trigger bar if the round does not fire.
b. Return the arming handle to SAFE.
c. Remove the LAW from your shoulder, collapse it, and reextend it (keeping hands
clear of the front and rear tube openings).
d. Replace the LAW on your shoulder.
________________________________________________________________
I-49
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2203
e. Check the backblast area.
f. Arm, aim, and attempt to fire.
g. If the LAW still fails to fire, return to SAFE, remove from shoulder, collapse the
tube (this keeps the firing mechanism from functioning), and discard.
NOTE: Do not leave an intact LAW on the battlefield. The enemy can and will use it against
you.
h. If another LAW is available, try to engage the target if it is still in range or poses a
threat to your unit.
Setup: Place an expended M72A2 LAW on a table or ground cover. It should be locked in
the fully extended position with the safety handle in the arm position. Then depress the trigger.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier to place the LAW on his or her shoulder as if firing it. Tell the
soldier to apply immediate action to correct a malfunction as if in a combat situation.
EVALUATION GUIDE
1. Applies immediate action.
Results
P
F
a. Presses the trigger bar.
b. Returns the arming handle to SAFE.
c. Removes the LAW from shoulder.
d. Collapses the launcher enough to cock it.
e. Extends the launcher until it locks.
Results
f. Keeps hands clear of the tube openings during steps 4 and 5.
g. Places the LAW on shoulder for firing.
________________________________________________________________
I-50
071-318-2203
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
h. Checks the backblast area (may be done anytime after extending the
launcher but before arming the launcher.)
i. Arms the launcher.
j. Presses the trigger bar.
2. Completes all required steps in sequence.
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
FM 23-33
TM 9-1340-241-10
TEC Lesson 948-071-005-F
Related
________________________________________________________________
I-51
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2210
PREPARE AN M72A2 LIGHT ANTITANK WEAPON FOR FIRING
071-318-2210
CONDITIONS
Given an M72A2 light antitank weapon (LAW).
STANDARDS
Prepare an M72A2 LAW for firing observing all safety precautions.
CAUTION
abrasions.
1. Perform prefire safety precautions.
a. Inspect the LAW to ensure all seals are intact and the tube has not been cracked,
punctured, or crushed.
b. Check the safety handle to ensure it is spring-loaded.
________________________________________________________________
I-52
071-318-2210
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
WARNING
1. CHECK THE DATA PLATE ON THE LAUNCHER FOR THE WORDS
"WITH COUPLER." IF THE WORDS ARE NOT ON THE DATA PLATE,
DO NOT USE THE LAUNCHER.
2. ENSURE THAT ALL PARTS OF THE BODY ARE CLEAR OF THE
LAUNCHER MUZZLE AND REAR END. ONCE THE WEAPON IS
PLACED ON THE SHOULDER, KEEP IT POINTED DOWNRANGE.
2. Prepare the launcher for firing.
a. Remove the pull pin and rotate the rear cover downward (Figure 1), allowing the
front cover and sling assembly to fall free. Do not discard the sling assembly until the rocket is
fired.
Figure 1. Removing front cover and sling assembly.
b. Extend the launcher by grasping the rear sight cover (Figure 2) and sharply pulling
the launcher to the rear until locked in position (Figure 3). Attempt to collapse the launcher by
reversing the motion of your hands to verify it is locked in position.
________________________________________________________________
I-53
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2210
Figure 2. Grasping rear sight cover.
NOTE: The operating instruction decal on the LAW shows the LAW being extended with one
hand under the tube and one on top. The method of placing both hands on top of
the tube is recommended for extending the LAW.
Figure 3. Pulling to locked position.
c. Place the weapon on the shoulder (Figure 4).
________________________________________________________________
I-54
071-318-2210
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
Figure 4. Placing LAW on shoulder.
d. Check the backblast area. If soldiers are in the backblast area, warn them and
wait for them to get out of the area before arming the launcher.
e. Move the safety handle to ARM (Figure 5) once the backblast area is clear.
Figure 5. Arming the LAW.
Setup: Use an expended LAW to test the prefire safety inspection. If a group is being tested,
have several expended LAWs with different defects (such as seals not intact; tube cracked,
punctured, or crushed; and missing data plate) and give them out randomly to the soldiers for
inspection. Use a serviceable expended LAW for the rest of the test. When testing the
preparation of the launcher for firing, have someone stand in the backblast area so that you can
________________________________________________________________
I-55
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2210
score step 2.d.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier to perform a prefire safety inspection and tell you whether or not
the LAW is usable, and if not, why not. After the inspection, give the soldier a serviceable
expended LAW and tell the soldier to prepare the LAW for firing.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Conduct the prefire inspection.
P
F
P
F
a. Check the seals to see if they are intact.
b. Check the tube for cracks, punctures, or crushing.
c. Check the safety handle to ensure it is spring-loaded.
d. Check the data plate on the launcher for the words "with coupler."
e. Tell the trainer whether the LAW is usable or, if not,
why it is unusable.
2. Prepare the launcher for firing.
a. Remove the sling assembly.
b. Extend the LAW until it is locked into position.
c. Place the LAW on shoulder with the front end of the LAW
toward the target.
d. Check the backblast area before arming the LAW.
e. Arm the LAW while keeping it on the shoulder.
FEEDBACK
________________________________________________________________
I-56
071-318-2210
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
REFERENCES
Required
FM 23-33
Related
________________________________________________________________
I-57
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2211
RESTORE AN M72A2 LIGHT ANTITANK WEAPON TO
CARRYING CONFIGURATION
071-318-2211
CONDITIONS
Given an M72A2 light antitank weapon that has been prepared for firing.
STANDARDS
Return the M72A2 LAW to carrying configuration while observing all safety precautions.
CAUTION
abrasions.
1. Collapse the launcher.
a. Return the trigger safety handle to SAFE, then remove the launcher from your
shoulder.
b. Grasp the launcher by the rear sight housing and depress the detent boot (Figure 1).
________________________________________________________________
I-58
071-318-2211
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
Figure 1. Depressing detent boot.
c. Collapse the launcher slightly (Figure 2).
Figure 2. Collapsing launcher slightly.
d. Move hand from the detent boot to the front sight.
e. Hold the front sight down and collapse the launcher until the inner tube covers the
tip of the front sight (Figure 3).
________________________________________________________________
I-59
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2211
Figure 3. Securing front sight.
f. Fold the rear sight down and guide it under the sight housing (Figure 4).
g. Compress the launcher until travel is stopped by the lip on the front sight. Press the
front sight lip with the thumb and slowly compress the launcher over the lip edge (Figure 5).
Figure 4. Securing rear sight.
Figure 5. Depressing front sight lip.
h. Remove the thumb from the front sight and grasp the housing.
i. Close the launcher fully (Figure 6).
________________________________________________________________
I-60
071-318-2211
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
Figure 6. Close the launcher fully.
2. Secure covers and sling assembly.
a. Close the rear cover, ensuring that the round lock fits through the slot in the cover.
b. Replace the cover pull pin (Figure 7).
Figure 7. Replacing the cover pull pin.
NOTE: The cover pull pin should be inserted from right to left with the short end through the
cover closing lug and the long end through the round lock, which protrudes through
the rear cover.
________________________________________________________________
I-61
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
071-318-2211
c. Replace the front cover and hold in place.
d. Replace the sling assembly.
(1) Grasp both web straps of the sling assembly next to the hook springs and
place the thumb on the rear cover above the hinge.
(2) Exert downward pressure with the thumb while pulling up on the sling
assembly until the hooks snap into position over the cover hinge.
NOTE: Do not use the rear cover as a lever to assist in attaching the sling assembly. This
will damage the cover hinge.
Setup: Provide a serviceable expended M72A2 LAW that has been extended and prepared
for firing. The test will start with the launcher on the soldier's shoulder with the trigger safety in
the fire position.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he is to go through all steps and place the M72A2 LAW into
the carrying configuration.
EVALUATION GUIDE
1. Collapse the launcher.
Results
P
F
a. Return the trigger safety to SAFE before removing
launcher from shoulder.
b. Depress the detent boot.
c. Collapse the launcher.
d. Depress the front sight and collapse the launcher to cover tip of
the front sight.
e. Fold the rear sight down and guide it under the sight housing.
f. Compress the launcher until stopped by the front sight lip.
________________________________________________________________
I-62
071-318-2211
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
g. Depress the front sight lip and compress the launcher over
the lip edge.
h. Collapse the launcher fully.
2. Secures the cover and sling assembly.
P
F
a. Close the rear cover with the round lock fitting through
the slot in the cover.
b. Replace cover pull pin.
c. Insert the cover pull pin from right to left.
d. Replace the front cover and sling assembly.
NOTE: If soldier uses the rear cover as a lever in attaching sling assembly, he will receive a
NO-GO for the task.
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
FM 23-33
Related
________________________________________________________________
I-63
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
071-SL1-XX12
LOAD THE 84-MM RANGER ANTIARMOR WEAPONS SYSTEM
071-SL1-XX12
CONDITIONS
Given an 84-mm Ranger Antiarmor Weapons System and a round of ammunition
STANDARDS
Load the launcher within ten (10) seconds.
CAUTION
abrasions.
1. Loading the weapon.
a. Gunner:
NOTE: Gunner checks the weapon for dents or cracks, proper operation of all moving parts,
and cleanliness.
•
Assume a firing position. Hold gun horizontally on right shoulder and support gun
mount against upper body:
________________________________________________________________
I-64
071-SL1-XX12
•
Grasp firing grip with right hand and front grip with left hand.
•
Push cocking lever (1) fully forward with right hand thumb (Figure 1).
•
Set Safety catch to S (SAFE) (2) (Figure 1).
•
Order “LOAD”.
Figure 1. Loading the Weapon.
b. Assistant gunner:
•
Assume a position to the right of the gun.
•
Take out a round from the container and hold it on left forearm with nose of shell to
the right and with recess in cartridge case turned down.
• Using right hand, move venturi locking lever forward (3) and open venturi (4).
________________________________________________________________
I-65
071-SL1-XX12
•
Check that chamber and bore are free from dirt.
•
Insert round into chamber with left hand.
•
Align recess in cartridge case with cartridge guide.
•
Using right hand, close venturi and flick the venturi locking lever to the rear.
•
Call “READY”.
2. Unloading the weapon.
a. Gunner:
•
Hold the weapon as when loading.
•
Push cocking lever fully forward with right hand thumb.
•
Set Safety catch to S (SAFE).
•
Order “UNLOAD”.
Figure 2. Unloading the Weapon.
•
Using right hand, move venturi locking lever forward and open venturi.
•
Flick venturi locking lever forward, thus forcing round rearward (2).
•
Remove round from weapon with left hand and put it down.
________________________________________________________________
I-66
071-SL1-XX12
•
Using right hand, close venturi.
3. Special handling instructions for FFV 545B (illumination round) and FFV 441B (HE
round).
a. Gunner:
•
FFV 545B illumination round:
•
Take the same measures as in normal loading.
•
Mount the illumination sight to the telescopic sight of the weapon (see Prepare for
Firing).
•
Take the same measures as in normal loading but before opening venturi: Set fuze
for required range. If the round is not used, the fuze setting ring is to be reset to
zero (0) (Figure 3).
Figure 3. Setting the Illumination Fuze to the Safe Position.
c. When using the illuminating round, the gun must be at a 20 degree or 25 degree
elevation and the gunner must be in a standing or kneeling position.
•
•
20 degrees for 800, 1100, 1400 and 1700 meters (2600, 3600, 4600, and
5600 feet). The elevation of 20 degrees is found by raising the weapon until the
elevation index appears in center of the luminous pane (Figure 4a).
25 degrees for 500 meters (1640 feet). To obtain the elevation of 25 degrees,
elevation index appears in the top of luminous pane (Figure 4b).
________________________________________________________________
I-67
071-SL1-XX12
Figure 4. Observing the Luminous Pane.
Figure 5. Illumination range Chart.
d. Possible ranges 500, 800, 1100, 1400 and 1700 meters.
•
The fuze is set by turning in a counter clockwise direction(Figure 6).
•
The fuze is safe when the raised dot on the range knob is aligned with the zero
(notch) on the range scale.
________________________________________________________________
I-68
071-SL1-XX12
Figure 6. Setting the Fuze on the Illumination Round.
e. Gunner:
NOTE: Range scale on telescopic sight must be set on the green scale.
•
FFV 441B HE:
•
Take the same measures as in normal loading.
•
See aiming rules on (Engage a Target).
f. Assistant gunner:
•
Take the same measures as in normal loading but before opening venturi.
•
Set fuze for the required purpose or range.
1) Impact burst on the target (1).
2) Impact burst above the target (2).
3) Air burst above the target (3).
________________________________________________________________
I-69
071-SL1-XX12
Figure 7. HE Round Range Chart.
statement.
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that he will conduct gunner/assistant gunner duties when checking
the weapon for damage, and when loading and unloading the 84-mm Recoilless Rifle M3 W/E.
launcher.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Inspects the weapon for damage.
P
Results
2. Gunner prepares the weapon for loading.
P
F
F
________________________________________________________________
I-70
071-SL1-XX12
3. Assistant gunner loads the round into the weapon.
P
F
4. Gunner prepares the weapon for unloading.
P
F
5. Assistant gunner unloads the round from the weapon.
P
F
6. Explains how to set the fuze on the Illumination and HE rounds
for a given range.
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Related
FM 90-10-1
FM 7-8
FM 7-7J
________________________________________________________________
I-71
071-SL1-XX13
PREPARE THE 84-MM RANGER ANTIARMOR WEAPONS
SYSTEM FOR FIRING
071-SL1-XX13
CONDITIONS
Given an 84-mm Ranger Antiarmor Weapons System, a round of ammunition, a target, and a
firing position.
STANDARDS
Prepare the launcher for firing, within 1 minute.
CAUTION
abrasions.
NOTE: Before firing the launcher, inspect the exterior of the launcher for damage during
movement.
________________________________________________________________
I-72
071-SL1-XX13
Key
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Item
Venturi
Barrel with carrying handle
Firing pin
Cocking lever
Safety catch
Telescopic/night sights
Illumination sight
Open sights
Gunner checks to insure
No dents. Proper operation. Clean.
Clean. No obstructions. No dents.
Not damaged.
Operates freely.
Safety catch
Not damaged. No play in bracket. Clean.
Not damaged. Nor cracked; fits properly.
Not damaged. Proper operation.
Table1. Prefire inspection.
1. Installation/removal and adjustments of sights.
a. Installation/removal of “V” slide assembly (with or without sight):
•
To install: Align guide projection on “V” slide assembly (2) with slots on “V” slide
mounting bracket.
•
Press “V” slide down until it clicks securely into the “V” slide-mounting bracket.
•
To remove: Squeeze lever arms (3) 0n “V” slide mounting bracket.
•
Lift “V” slide from “V” slide mounting bracket.
________________________________________________________________
I-73
071-SL1-XX13
Figure 1. Sight “V” Slide Installation.
b. Installation/removal of telescope sight with rings to/from the “V” slide assembly.
NOTE: Night sight is attached to the “V” slide assembly using the same procedure.
•
To install: Ensure locking levers (4) are turned outwards in line with the telescope
(5).
•
Place front ring (6) with locating bar in front slot on Weaver rail (7).
•
Ensure rear ring (8) is seated on the rail.
•
Turn front locking lever 180 inwards to lock front ring.
•
Turn back locking lever 180 inward to lock the telescope onto the rail.
• To remove: Turn front and back locking levers 180 outwards to release the sight
________________________________________________________________
I-74
071-SL1-XX13
from the rail.
•
Lift telescopic sight off the rail.
c. Installation/removal of illumination sight.
WARNING
The illumination sight contains a small vial of radioactive tritium H3.
Take care not to abuse, tamper or alter it in any manner.
•
To install: Install telescopic sight on weapon.
•
Place illumination sight in position by mounting it on bracket (1).
•
Pull locking lever (2) on illumination sight rearward to lock in place.
•
To remove: Remove in reverse order.
Figure 2. Installation/removal of Illumination Sight.
2. Scale adjustment: To change from the white or green scale, turn range drum
counterclockwise to stop (or zero) push inward or pull outward to desired scale.
3. Temperature correction adjustment:
a. Both the open sights and the telescopic sight have temperature correction indexes.
________________________________________________________________
I-75
071-SL1-XX13
If ambient temperatures differ considerably from the normal one (32-86 degrees F.), the
position of the measure of impact will change. To correct for this error, the sights have three
temperature indexes, one for hot ammunition (above 86 degrees F.), a blue one for cold
ammunition (below 32 degrees F.), and a white one for normal temperature ammunition (32-87
degrees F.).
b. To place the correct temperature setting on the telescopic sight, loosen the locking
screw and turn the elevation drum so the 0 mark points to the appropriate temperature index (0
marks pointing to the white index equals boresighted weapon). Tighten locking screw.
Figure 3. Telescopic Sight Temperature Correction Adjustment.
c. To place the correct temperature setting on the open sights, loosen indicator screw
(1) and turn the range knob so the 0 Mark points to the appropriate temperature index (0 mark
pointing to the white index equals boresighted weapon). Tighten indicator screw.
________________________________________________________________
I-76
071-SL1-XX13
Figure 4. Open Sight Temperature Correction Adjustment.
4. Adjustment of front grip and shoulder pad.
a. Front grip adjustment:
•
Remove screw (1), washer (2), and front grip (3).
•
Move front grip to desired position.
•
Install washer (2) and screw (1) and tighten.
b. Shoulder pad adjustment:
•
Remove two screws (1), left tension plate (2), right tension plate (3), and shoulder
pad with attaching hardware (4).
•
Move shoulder pad to desired position.
•
Install right tension plate (3), left tension plate (2), and two screws (1).
________________________________________________________________
I-77
071-SL1-XX13
Figure 5. Adjustment of Front Grip and Shoulder Pad.
5. Boresighting: Properly performed boresighting is a prerequisite of combat effectiveness.
Boresighting should be checked frequently and especially when the telescopic sight has been
removed from the weapon such as after transportation in vehicles.
a. Tools and equipment: Rear and front boresight discs (1)-(2).
________________________________________________________________
I-78
071-SL1-XX13
b. 3.5-mm flat tip screwdriver from tool kit.
c. Equipment condition: Telescopic sight installed.
NOTE: Night sight is boresighted and adjusted using the same procedure except there are no
locking screws.
Figure 6. Boresighting.
d. Insert front boresight disc into muzzle (1).
e. Open venturi and insert rear boresight disc (2).
f. Close venturi.
•
Gunner: Loosen locking screws (4) of elevation and azimuth drums. Set range
drum (5) to 0. Aim at clearly visible object (fixed) at a range of 200-m (656 ft) or
more.
•
Assistant gunner: Look through venturi and align front and rear boresight discs with
boresighting object.
•
Gunner: When looking through the telescopic sight, adjust sight, elevation and
azimuth to coincide with assistant gunner’s view on boresighting object.
•
Assistant gunner: During adjusting, constantly keep gunner informed of gun
alignment with boresighting object.
________________________________________________________________
I-79
•
071-SL1-XX13
Gunner: Tighten locking screws (4) of elevation and azimuth drums. Loosen scale
clamping screws (6), slip elevation and azimuth scales (7) to 0 and tighten screws.
Check the setting.
6. Open sights.
a. Tools and equipment:
•
Rear and front boresight discs.
•
3.5 mm-flat tip screwdriver from tool kit.
NOTE: Telescopic sight is not installed.
b. Insert front boresight disc into muzzle.
c. Open venturi and insert rear boresight disc.
d. Close venturi.
•
Gunner: Loosen locking screw (4) of the rear open sight. Set rear sight to 0 (Use
the range knob (5) and aim at a fixed object at a range of 200-m (656 ft) or more).
•
Assistant gunner: Look through the venturi and align front and rear boresight discs
with boresighting object.
•
Gunner: When looking through the open sights, adjust the rear sight in elevation
and azimuth to coincide with assistant gunner’s view on boresighting object.
(Elevation with the range knob (5) and azimuth by moving the aperture sight (6).)
•
Assistant gunner: During adjusting, constantly keep gunner informed of gun
alignment with boresighting object.
•
Gunner: When boresighting is correct, tighten locking screw (4) and check setting.
•
Gunner: Loosen indicator screw (7) and set indicator with white index center
pointing to 0. Tighten screw. Check setting.
________________________________________________________________
I-80
071-SL1-XX13
Figure 7. Open Sights Adjustments for boresighting.
statement.
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that he will prepare the 84-mm Recoilless Rifle M3 W/E. launcher
for firing. During this test there will be no ammunition loaded in the weapon.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Installs the “V” slide assembly.
P
Results
F
a. Installs telescopic sight with rings to the “V” slide assembly.
b. Installs illumination sight, if required.
________________________________________________________________
I-81
071-SL1-XX13
2. Performs a temperature correction adjustment on the telescopic sight
P
F
4. Makes an adjustment to the front grip and the shoulder pads.
P
F
5. Conducts boresight procedures as gunner and assistant gunner.
P
F
3. Performs a temperature correction adjustment on the open sights.
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Related
FM 90-10-1
FM 7-8
________________________________________________________________
I-82
071-SL1-XX14
ENGAGE TARGETS WITH AN 84-MM RANGER ANTIARMOR
WEAPONS SYSTEM
071-SL1-XX14
CONDITIONS
Given an 84-mm Ranger Antiarmor Weapons System with assorted rounds and targets suitable
for engagement such as bunkers, armored vehicles, and buildings. Given a firing position with
specific Rules of Engagement (ROE).
STANDARDS
Engage leader-designated targets in a MOUT environment from the standing, kneeling, sitting,
and prone positions, achieving four target hits out of four firings.
CAUTION
abrasions.
1. Selecting Firing positions. The 84-mm Ranger Antiarmor Weapons System launcher is
fired in the standing, kneeling, sitting, or prone position. You must ensure that the position
selected is stable, comfortable, and most suitable for engaging the target.
2. Firing positions and Warnings.
________________________________________________________________
I-83
071-SL1-XX14
WARNING
PRIOR TO ASSUMING A FIRING POSITION, THE GUNNER AND ALL
OTHER PERSONNEL WITHIN A 60-METER RADIUS OF THE WEAPON
MUST WEAR PROPERLY INSERTED FOAM EARPLUGS (NSN 6515-00137-6345). THE USE OF ORTHER TYPES OF EAR PROTECTION
(TRIPLE-FLANGE TYPE FOR EXAMPLE) IS NOT AUTHORIZED AND CAN
RESULT IN PERMANENT LOSS OF HEARING.
a. Backblast danger zones:
•
The danger zone for personnel behind the weapon is limited to a sector with a
radius of 60 meters (200 ft) and an angle of 45 feet to either side of the rear of the
venturi.
•
Danger Zone A = 5 meters (17 ft) danger from backblast, heat and flying debris.
Obstacles such as barriers, big trees, or other large vertical objects must not be in
this zone because of the risk of debris ricochets.
•
Danger Zone B (includes zone A) = 60 meters (200 ft) danger from backblast and
flying debris. No personnel allowed.
•
In the prone position, the gunner’s legs shall point minimum 30 degrees to the left.
The right foot shall rest on the left ankle.
•
When firing from a trench or a foxhole, the firing position must allow the gases to
pass over the edge of the foxhole or trench.
________________________________________________________________
I-84
071-SL1-XX14
Figure 1. Backblast Danger Zone.
WARNING
For protection against radiant energy (HEAT), the gunner and nearby
personnel must wear helmet and keep uniform sleeves rolled down
and collar turned up.
WARNING
The arming distance of the FFV 551 HEAT round is 5 to 8 meters (17-to
26 ft). Extreme care must be taken when firing at targets less than
50meters (165 ft) because fragmentation may cause injury or death.
________________________________________________________________
I-85
071-SL1-XX14
WARNING
The arming distance of the FFV 441B HE round is 20 to 70 meters (65
to 26 ft). Extreme care must be taken when firing at targets less than
250 meters (750 ft) because fragmentation may cause injury or death.
Use extreme caution when firing within 300 meters (984 ft) of friendly
troops.
•
Because of excessive noise levels, the following restrictions apply during training
and war-time:
TYPE OF ROUND
FIRING POSITION
FFV 441B HE, 469B
SMOKE/545B ILLUMINATING
FFV 551 HEAT/552 TP
FFV 441B, 469B SMOKE, 551
HEAT/552 TP
FFV 441B, 469B SMOKE, 551
HEAT, 545B
ILLUMINATING/552 TP
FFV 553B, BACKBLAST
CHARGE FOR SUBCALIBER
DEVICE
STANDING
NO. OF ROUNDS IN
24 HOURS
4
STANDING
SITTING
7
1
KNEELING
1
33
Table 1. Number Of Rounds Allowed Per Day.
* No tactical round may be fired from prone or foxhole positions.
WARNING
ALL PERSONNEL THAT OPERATE AND/OR MAINTAIN THE
ILLUMINATION SIGHT MUST BE AWARE OF RADIATION WARNINGS
WHEN HANDLING THE EQUIPMENT.
b. Safety precautions:
•
The radioactive material used in these instruments is tritium gas (H3) sealed in a
glass vial. It poses no significant hazard to the soldier when intact. These sources
illuminate the instrumentation for night operations. Federal law prohibits tampering
with or removal of the sources in the field. In the event there is no illumination,
notify the local Radiological Protection Officer. Do not attempt to repair or replace
________________________________________________________________
I-86
071-SL1-XX14
the instrument in the field! If skin contact is made with any area contaminated with
tritium, immediately wash with nonabrasive soap and water. No maintenance or
polishing (other than external cleaning of the sight) is authorized.
c. Assuming firing positions: Always press the gun against the shoulder and try to
support the elbows against the body or equipment on the body. The numbers referenced are
on Figure 2.
•
Standing:
1) Positioning of bipod (1)
2) Support of elbows (2)
•
Kneeling or sitting
1) Positioning of bipod (1)
2) Support of elbows (2). Avoid bone to bone contact
•
Prone
1) Angle between body and weapon more than 30 degrees
2) Support (3) and (4)
________________________________________________________________
I-87
071-SL1-XX14
Figure 2. Weapon Firing Positions.
3. For loading procedures, see Task # 071-SL1 XX20.
4. Aiming rules.
a. When engaging armored fighting vehicles (Figure 3):
•
Determine (estimate) range
•
Set the range
•
Select aiming point
________________________________________________________________
I-88
071-SL1-XX14
Figure 3. Aiming Rules.
NOTE: Night sight is aimed using the same procedure.
b. Telescopic sight (Table 2):
________________________________________________________________
I-89
071-SL1-XX14
RULE
Aim with center post of
reticle at center of mass
TARGETS
Stationary or when target is
proceeding directly at you or
away from you
SIGHT PICTURES
Aim with 1st lead mark of
Moving targets (10 km/h)
(6.2 mph)
Graphic not Available
Aim with 2nd lead mark of
(12.5 mph)
Table 2. Target Aiming Point with Telescopic Sight.
c. Open sight (Table 3):
RULE
Aim with center post at
center of mass
TARGETS
Stationary. When target is
proceeding directly at you or
away from you
SIGHT PICTURES
Aim with lead mark at center Moving targets (15 km/h (9.3
of mass
mph)
Aim with front sight ring at
center of mass
(18.6 mph)
Table 3. Target Aiming Point with Open Sight.
5. Arming and Firing.
a. Accuracy is dependent upon quality of:
•
Firing position
•
Breath control
•
Aiming control
•
Trigger squeeze
________________________________________________________________
I-90
071-SL1-XX14
b. Gunner:
•
Set safety catch to F (Fire).
•
Call out “READY TO FIRE”
Figure 4. Trigger and Safety controls.
•
Check backblast area.
•
Call out “Backblast area all clear”.
statement.
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that he will engage designated targets from the standing,
kneeling, sitting, and prone positions, achieving four target hits in four firings.
EVALUATION GUIDE
________________________________________________________________
I-91
071-SL1-XX14
Results
1. Demonstrates all firing positions.
P
F
2. Explains aiming techniques for stationary and moving targets using
the Telescopic sight and the Open sight.
P
F
P
F
P
F
3. Demonstrates procedures of arming and firing the weapon.
6. Engages and hits 4 out 4 selected targets.
P
P
F
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Related
FM 90-10-1
FM 7-8
FM 7-7J
________________________________________________________________
I-92
071-SL1-XX15
PERFORM COMBAT MISFIRE PROCEDURES ON THE 84-MM
RANGER ANTIARMOR WEAPONS SYSTEM
071-SL1-XX15
CONDITIONS
Given an 84-mm Ranger Antiarmor Weapons System, with a loaded round that has a simulated
misfire.
STANDARDS
Take immediate actions for a misfired round of ammunition or a jammed round of ammunition.
CAUTION
abrasions.
1. Misfire procedures (Combat conditions).
a. Wait 5 seconds and recock mechanism.
b. Aim and pull trigger.
•
If a new misfire occurs
________________________________________________________________
I-93
071-SL1-XX15
c. Recock mechanism
d. Aim and pull trigger.
•
If it still misfires
e. Reload with a new round.
•
Follow loading procedures outlined in Task # 071-SL1-XX20.
2. Jammed rounds.
a. Actions to be taken if a complete round or a cartridge case jams in the gun. The
following cases are possible:
(1) It is possible to load the gun and close the venturi. The gun is not fired
and when unloading, the round is jammed in the chamber.
(2) It is possible to load the gun and close the venturi. The gun is fired and
when unloading the cartridge case is jammed in the chamber.
(3) It is possible to load the gun, but the venturi cannot be closed. In this
case the round is jammed in the chamber.
b. Actions to be taken in cases 1-3, above:
•
Keep the gun in the firing direction.
•
Make sure that the extractor/extractor spring is not damaged.
•
Set the weapon to position safe and open the venturi.
•
Using the cleaning tool assembly mounted to the cleaning rod, drive the shell or the
cartridge case backwards out of the chamber. Never use a metal object! Catch
the round with your hands when it comes loose from the chamber.
3. Actions to be taken if a round jams in the barrel. The following case is possible: If the
propelling charge in the cartridge case cannot drive out the round, which jams in the barrel, put
down the weapon carefully on the ground and report the incident.
________________________________________________________________
I-94
071-SL1-XX15
WARNING
The weapon is now to be treated as a dud. Notify range safety
personnel.
statement.
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that he will conduct gunner/assistant gunner duties when
checking the weapon for damage, and when loading and unloading the 84-mm Ranger Antitank
Weapons System.
EVALUATION GUIDE
1. Announces misfire when the round fails to launch.
Results
P
F
2. Waits 5 seconds and recocks mechanism.
P
F
4. Announces misfire if the round fails to launch.
P
F
5. Recocks mechanism.
P
F
6. Aims and pulls the trigger a second time.
P
F
7. Round did not fire; announces reload.
P
F
3. Resumes firing position and aims and pulls trigger.
8. Explains what can cause a jammed round and how to remove one.
P
P
F
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
Related
________________________________________________________________
I-95
OPERATORS MANUAL
071-SL1-XX15
FM 90-10-1
FM 7-8
FM 7-7J
________________________________________________________________
I-96
071-326-0541
PERFORM MOVEMENT TECHNIQUES IN AN URBAN
ENVIRONMENT
071-326-0541
CONDITIONS
As a member of an assault element in urban terrain with the enemy location and strength
uncertain; given an individual weapon with ammunition and load-bearing equipment.
STANDARDS
Perform a visual reconnaissance to determine the next position; then, using proper movement
techniques, move rapidly from one covered and concealed position to the next covered or
concealed position with minimum exposure to enemy fire.
CAUTION
abrasions.
NOTES: 1. Individual movement techniques within urban terrain differ slightly from the basic
movements used in normal field operations. Several movement techniques take on
added importance during combat in urban terrain because of the special nature of
the battle area.
________________________________________________________________
I-97
071-326-0541
2. In urban terrain, the individual soldier is confronted with different types of
obstacles that must be negotiated, breached, or bypassed to eliminate or capture an
enemy position. Street-to-street and house-to-house fighting give rise to many
surprising situations, so alertness and all-round security are mandatory. The enemy
may appear not only from the front, flanks, and rear, but also from above and
below.
1. Follow general rules of movement:
a. Take care not to be silhouetted in doors or windows, or on rooftops.
b. Avoid open areas such as streets, alleys, and parks, when possible.
c. Make a visual reconnaissance of the next position before moving.
R-5, Intelligence Collection/Dissemination: Leaders should consider the use of
Unmanned Arial Vehicle (UAV) or Unmanned Ground Vehicle (UGV) for reconnaissance
and intelligence of a given area.
d. Take advantage of all cover and concealment. Concealment may be provided by
smoke or vegetation. Cover may be provided by suppressive fires and by using buildings and
rubble for movement.
e. Always move rapidly from one position to another.
f. Be alert and expect the unexpected. The weapon must be kept in an appropriate
ready position, ready to fire at targets or to suppress enemy positions. The firing hand should
not be used for anything except handling the weapon.
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers should
wear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlies
while not signaling them to the enemy.
________________________________________________________________
I-98
071-326-0541
CAUTION
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before conducting operations in urban
terrain, all soldiers should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts
and abrasions.
2. Observe around corners.
NOTE: Corners are hazardous to untrained soldiers who are not alert. The most common
mistakes untrained soldiers make are: first, not recognizing the danger area;
second, extending their weapons beyond the corner, which exposes their presence;
and third, showing their heads at a height that enemy soldiers would expect to see
them.
NOTE: Remember that line of sight works in both directions. Anyone around the corner
who becomes visible as you look around the corner will also be able to see you.
a. Lie flat on the ground, weapon at the side, then move forward slowly, ensuring
that the weapon is not forward of the corner. Expose the head slowly at ground level so that it
appears to be a shadow. Expose the head only enough to observe around the corner (Figure
1). Have the weapon ready to fire.
________________________________________________________________
I-99
071-326-0541
Figure 1. Observing around a corner.
OR
b. Use the pie method to observe around a corner or barrier to expedite movement.
•
As shown in Figure 2, (using the numbered circles), step away from the wall in a
careful hurry, steps 1-6. Observe only as far around the corner as your weapons
carry and stance will provide. Remember to look around the corner for danger in
all three levels, above ground, ground, and below ground.
•
Some movement in an urban environment will not be individual; this method can be
used within a Buddy team. Both members move and observe in the same direction
at the same time.
•
Weapon is in the high ready position. (See task 071-SL1-XXX4, Engage Targets
in an Urban Environment Using Reflexive Firing techniques.) Ensure proper stance
and aiming. Be ready to engage targets if needed.
•
Ensure you are far enough away from the corner to not flag your weapon and
expose your position.
•
Use the wall for cover and concealment from the area you have not observed.
OR
CORNER
1
2
3
4
5
6
MOVEMENT OF
INDIVIDUAL
________________________________________________________________
I-100
071-326-0541
Figure 2. Using the Pie method to observe around a corner.
c. Conduct a "tactical peek" to observe around a corner or barrier. This consists of a
hasty look around the corner, with the element of speed that provides security to the movement.
The head is not held at normal height and the weapon is not normally exposed around the
corner.
3. Move across open areas.
NOTE: Open areas, such as streets, alleys, and parks, should be avoided when possible.
They are natural kill zones for enemy crew-served weapons. They can be crossed
with less risk if basic cautions are applied.
a. Make a visual reconnaissance of the area and position. Report the situation to the
other members of the element.
R-3, NLOS Radio: Due to the line of sight (LOS) nature of unit TO&E FM radios and
the decentralized nature of combat in urban terrain, the use of a NLOS radio for improved
communication capabilities should be considered. This type of radio may also be able to
provide the user with hands off capabilities, minimum body movement for operation, and
remote channel/frequency changing. If fielded to each soldier, it may provide the capability
of a unit “intercom”.
NOTE: Because of their lack of secure capability, transmissions on these radios must be
considered as being monitored by enemy forces, news media, and any entity
with a minimum of technology. Transmissions must be characterized by the use
of call signs, authentication, and prowords to transmit data.
b. Select a route that has some cover or concealment. If no cover or concealment is
available, use smoke and/or covering fire provided by the rest of the element (Figure 3).
________________________________________________________________
I-101
071-326-0541
Figure 3. Moving to the next position under cover of smoke.
c. Move in the most direct route to the selected position. Using the most direct route
reduces the time of exposure to enemy fire. Also, moving quickly denies the enemy the
opportunity to place well aimed shots.
d. Move from position to position without masking covering fires.
e. When the next position is reached, be prepared to cover the movement of other
members of the fire team or squad (Figure 3).
________________________________________________________________
I-102
071-326-0541
Figure 4. Moving from cover to cover.
f. When two or more soldiers must move at the same time to another position-(1) The soldiers must first position themselves so they are prepared to move to
their next position.
(2) The soldiers, on a planned signal, move across the open area at the same
time to the next position. When moving, they should remain dispersed.
________________________________________________________________
I-103
071-326-0541
4. Move parallel to buildings.
a. Move along the walls without “hugging” the wall. If enemy fire is directed at the
wall, it can travel down the length of the wall When moving parallel to a building, move along
the wall as closely as possible. That will deny an enemy soldier inside the building the chance
to fire without exposing himself to fire from the covering force.
(1) Use all available cover and concealment, move with a low silhouette and
advance rapidly from position to position. If smoke and suppressive fire is available, use it.
(2) When possible, move in the shadows, which helps to conceal movement.
b. Move past the first floor windows.
NOTE: Windows are danger points. Most first-floor windows are head high, and an
unsuspecting soldier will expose his head, giving the enemy an excellent shot from
cover.
(1) The right way to pass first-floor windows is to stay as close to the building
as possible. When the window is reached, duck the head well below the window.
(2) Always take care not to be silhouetted in a window (Figure 5).
Figure 5. Moving past window.
c. Move past basement windows.
(1) Do not merely walk or run past a basement window; your legs will present
________________________________________________________________
I-104
071-326-0541
a good target to an enemy gunner inside the building.
(2) The right way to pass a basement window is to keep as close to the
building as possible and, when you reach the window, step or jump above and pass the
window without exposing your legs (Figures 6 and 7).
Figure 6. Start movement past basement window.
Figure 7. Completion of movement past basement window.
________________________________________________________________
I-105
071-326-0541
5. Cross obstacles (walls, fences, and rooftops).
a. Move over walls and fences.
(1) Before crossing a wall or fence, look at and beyond it for booby traps,
enemy positions, and covered or concealed positions.
(2) Move rapidly to the obstacle and roll quickly over it, keeping the lowest
silhouette possible. Speed and a low silhouette deny the enemy a well-aimed shot.
(3) Move rapidly to the nearest position while maintaining a low silhouette,
with the weapon at the ready position (Figure 8).
b. Move over rooftops.
(1) Make a visual reconnaissance of the area and of the route to the next
position.
(2) Move rapidly across the area, maintaining a low silhouette and using all
available cover and concealment.
Figure 8. Crossing an obstacle.
6. Move inside buildings. As in all combat situations, move tactically and safely. Individuals
who are part of a clearing team must move in a standard manner, using practiced techniques
known to all. Preferably, do not move in front of windows or doors. If this is required,
continue movement beyond the windows and doors, not stopping in front of them and being
________________________________________________________________
I-106
071-326-0541
silhouetted.
R-30A, Breaching Devices: When explosives cannot be used or are not appropriate
or available for breaching, the assault team should consider the use of breaching devices
such as the Hooligan’s Tool, etc, to aid in movement inside buildings.
7. Use proper weapon carrying techniques IAW task 071-SL1-XXX4, Engage Targets in an
Urban Environment Using Reflexive Firing Techniques.
a. When moving, hold the weapon with the muzzle pointed in the direction of travel.
Keep the butt of the rifle in the pocket of the shoulder, with the muzzle slightly down to allow
for unobstructed vision. Keep both eyes open and swing the muzzle with your head so that the
rifle is always aimed where you are looking.
b. Avoid "flagging," or leading, with the weapon when working around windows,
doors, corners, or areas where obstacles must be negotiated. Flagging the weapon gives
advance warning to anyone looking in the your direction, making it easier for an enemy to grab
the weapon. Soldiers must keep their weapons under control at all times.
c. If you have a malfunction, immediately drop to one knee and conduct immediate
action to reduce the malfunction. If possible, seek cover and get out of other team members’
way. Once the weapon is operational, there is no need to return to the standing position to
engage targets unless you must move to another firing position. Valuable time is saved by
resuming target engagement from the kneeling position. When other members of the team see
you drop to one knee, they know immediately that you has a malfunction and that they should
engage targets in your sector. Before rising to your feet, you must warn other clearing team
members of your movement and only rise after they acknowledge you.
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he will be moving as a designated member of an assault
element in urban terrain. The enemy strength and location are unknown.
________________________________________________________________
I-107
071-326-0541
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Follows the general rules of movement.
P
F
P
F
P
F
a. Does not silhouette self.
b. Avoids open areas.
c. Makes visual reconnaissance of the next position before moving.
d. Conceals movement.
e. Moves rapidly.
f. Stays alert.
2. Observes around corners.
a. Exposes head slowly, at ground level, only long enough
to observe around the corner.
OR
b. Pies around corner.
OR
c. Conducts a tactical peek.
3. Moves across open areas.
a. Visually reconnoiters area and position.
b. Selects route with cover and concealment.
c. Moves in the most direct route.
d. Moves from position to position without masking covering fires.
Results
________________________________________________________________
I-108
071-326-0541
4. Moves parallel to the buildings.
P
F
P
F
a. Moves along the walls.
(1) Moves close to and parallel to the wall.
(2) Moves rapidly with a low silhouette.
(3) Moves in shadows when possible.
b. Moves past the first floor windows.
(1) Stays close to the building; keeps head below window.
(2) Does not silhouette self in window.
c. Moves past the basement windows.
d. Steps or jumps over windows.
5. Crosses obstacles.
a. Moves over walls or fences.
(1) Checks the obstacle for booby traps, enemy positions,
and covered and concealed positions.
(2) Moves quickly to the obstacle and quickly rolls over it;
maintains a low silhouette.
(3) Moves quickly to the nearest position; maintains a
low silhouette.
b. Moves over rooftops.
(1) Makes a visual reconnaissance.
(2) Moves quickly across the roof, maintains a low silhouette,
and uses all available cover.
Results
6. Moves inside buildings. Moves past windows and doors only
when required. Does not stop in front of windows and doors.
P F
________________________________________________________________
I-109
071-326-0541
7. Uses proper weapons carrying techniques.
P
F
a. Points weapon in direction of travel and swings weapon with head.
b. Does not lead with weapon.
c. Drops to one knee to correct a malfunction.
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
FM 7-8
FM 7-7J
Related
FM 90-10-1
________________________________________________________________
I-110
071-326-0550
PREPARE FIGHTING POSITIONS FOR INDIVIDUAL
AND CREW-SERVED WEAPONS IN AN URBAN ENVIRONMENT
071-326-0550
CONDITIONS
As a firer of an individual weapon or as a crewmember of a crew-served weapon crew, given a
firing position within a building, a sector of fire, and material to reinforce the position.
STANDARDS
Prepare the position to allow accurate fire to be placed on the enemy within the given sector of
fire, with the least possible exposure and maximum protection from return fire.
CAUTION
abrasions.
NOTE: When a unit is defending in urban terrain, its success depends on the ability of soldiers
within the unit to place accurate fire upon the enemy with the least possible exposure
to return fire. Therefore, soldiers must constantly seek and improve firing positions
and use them properly.
1. Prepare individual rifle positions.
________________________________________________________________
I-111
071-326-0550
a. Prepare window positions. Improve window-fighting positions by barricading
around the window (Figure 1). Completely cover the window leaving only a small hole for the
firer's use. When barricading windows:
(1) DO NOT barricade only the windows that will be used as fighting
positions (the enemy will soon determine which ones they are).
(2) DO NOT form neat, square, or rectangular holes; the enemy will easily
spot them. The window should keep its original shape so that the position of the individual
firing is hard to detect. Firing from the bottom of the window is less obvious to the enemy.
Figure 1. Barricaded window.
(3) Prepare barricades with sandbags, materials available in the room,
materials torn from the interior walls of the building, or other available materials (Figure 2).
NOTE: Do not remove so much material from interior walls that the building is weakened.
________________________________________________________________
I-112
071-326-0550
Figure 2. Barricaded fighting position.
(4) Remove all glass from the window to prevent injury from flying glass.
R-30A, Breaching Devices: When explosives can’t be used or aren’t appropriate or
available for breaching, the assault team should consider the use of breaching devices such
as the Hooligan’s Tool, etc, to remove all glass from windows and create loopholes and
mouseholes.
(5) Leave curtains in place--they let the firer see out and prevent the enemy
from seeing in.
(6) Place a wet blanket over dusty surfaces in front of the weapon's muzzle or
wet down those surfaces to prevent dust from the muzzle blast from revealing the position
(Figure 3).
________________________________________________________________
I-113
071-326-0550
Figure 3. Prepared automatic weapon position.
(7) Wire mesh over the outside of the window keeps the enemy from throwing
in hand grenades.
b. Prepare loopholes. Loopholes should be used extensively in the defense. They
should not be constructed in any logical pattern, nor should they all be at floor or tabletop level.
Varying their height and location makes them hard to pinpoint and identify. Windows usually
are good fighting positions, but they may not allow the firer to cover his full sector. Prepared
loopholes allow alternate fighting positions.
(1) Break or blow several small holes in the wall (Figure 4) to allow the firer to
observe and engage targets in his sector. Making several holes allows the firer to move from
one to another to deceive the enemy about his location.
R-30B, Rifle Launched Entry Munition: Soldiers and leaders should consider the use
of breaching devices such as the rifle launched entry munition to breach holes in walls
helping to create loopholes.
________________________________________________________________
I-114
071-326-0550
Figure 4. Loophole position.
NOTE: Dummy loopholes, shingles knocked off, or holes cut that are not intended to be
used as fighting positions aid in camouflage. Loopholes located behind shrubbery,
under doorjambs, and under the eaves of a building are hard to detect. In the
defense, as in the offense, a fighting position can be constructed using the building
for overhead cover.
(2) Knock other holes in the wall to make it difficult for the enemy to know
which hole the fire is coming from (Figure 5).
(3) Use sandbags or other material to reinforce the walls around loopholes.
NOTE: When reinforcing windows or loopholes, the firer places two layers of sandbags on
the floor under him. This protects him from an explosion on a lower floor when the
position is on the second floor or higher. He can use tables, bedsteads, or other
available material to provide overhead cover from falling debris or from explosions
above the position. A blast wall can be built to the rear of the position to protect the
firer from explosions in the room (Figure 6).
________________________________________________________________
I-115
071-326-0550
Figure 5. Camouflage loopholes.
NOTE: M203 positions have the same configuration as M16s with the exception that
loopholes would need to be larger to ensure the grenade launcher muzzle can be
inserted through the loophole with muzzle clearance. Special consideration must be
given to the minimum arming range, 14 to 28 meters, to ensure detonation on target
when firing in the direct fire mode.
________________________________________________________________
I-116
071-326-0550
Figure 6. Reinforced position.
c. Prepare sniper positions.
(1) Sniper positions should be on or near the top of the building being
defended to allow greater fields of fire (Figure 7). General areas (a building or group of
buildings) are designated as sniper positions, but the sniper selects the best position for
engagement. Masonry buildings that offer the best protection, long-range fields of fire, and
all-round observation are preferred. One type of a position a sniper can use is the rooftop.
Snipers do not normally select fighting positions in locations like church steeples because there is
no access to other fighting positions and the sniper becomes easily trapped. Good positions
may be found in hi-rise buildings on the upper (but not the top) floors.
________________________________________________________________
I-117
071-326-0550
Figure 7. Sniper positions.
(2) A chimney or other structure protruding through the roof of a building
provides a base from which a sniper position can be prepared. Part of the roofing material is
removed to allow the sniper to fire around the chimney while standing below roof level on a
constructed platform with only his head and shoulders above the roof.
(3) Sandbags may be used on the sides of the position to protect the sniper's
flanks.
2. Prepare machine gun positions.
a. The machine gun (M60, M240, and the M249 Squad Automatic Weapon) can be
emplaced in the same type of position as the individual firer, except that windows or doors
should be avoided. Windows and doors are where the enemy expects machine guns to be
emplaced, therefore they draw the most fire. Since machine guns are not as mobile as rifles,
they cannot move as quickly to avoid heavy fires.
b. Increased fields of fire can be obtained by locating the machine gun in the corner of
the building or sandbagged under a building. Available materials, such as desks, overstuffed
________________________________________________________________
I-118
071-326-0550
chairs, couches, and other items of furniture, should be integrated into the construction of
bunkers to add cover and concealment .
c. Emplace machine guns as low as possible, using loopholes behind shrubbery or
under doorjambs. Basement windows can also be used. By placing the machine gun at a
lower level, grazing fire is obtained (Figure 8).
Figure 8. Low machine gun position.
d. Although grazing fire is desirable when employing the machine gun, it may be
impractical or impossible due to destroyed vehicles, rubble, and other obstructions. In such
cases, emplace the machine gun at a higher location and fire from loopholes on the second or
third floor, or fire through a loophole in the roof (Figure 9).
________________________________________________________________
I-119
071-326-0550
Figure 9. High machine-gun placement.
3. Prepare antitank weapons position.
a. Position antitank weapons (Dragon, M72 LAW, AT4, 84-mm RAAWS,
SMAW, and Javelin) on upper stories for long-range coverage (Figure 10).
Figure 10. Antitank weapons placement.
________________________________________________________________
I-120
071-326-0550
b. Consider backblast in choosing and preparing an antitank weapon location. None
of the antitank weapons can be fired from an unvented or enclosed room (Figures 11 and 12).
Leaders must ensure the backblast misses other positions. For more exact backblast
information, refer to the chapter or appendix entitled “Safety” in the weapon’s respective field
manuals.
NOTE: When the temperature drops below freezing, all backblast areas double in size.
c. Avoid firing from inside a building. When firing from inside a building cannot be
avoided, the following conditions must be met before firing.
(1) The building must be sturdy.
(2) The ceiling must be at least 8 feet high.
(3) The floor size of the room must be at least 17 by 24 feet for an AT4, 15
by 12 feet for a Dragon, and 4 feet to the back wall for an M72 LAW backblast area. The
Javelin’s soft launch capability enables the gunner to fire from within an enclosed area with a
reduced danger from backblast overpressure or flying debris
Figure 11. Dragon position.
(4) In addition, an opening at least 20 square feet must be at the rear of the
________________________________________________________________
I-121
071-326-0550
weapon for backblast. An open 7- by 3-foot door is adequate.
(5) All glass must be removed from windows beside and behind the weapon;
windows and doors on the firing wall must be reinforced only, to avoid drawing attention to
them. Reinforcing the windows also helps protect soldiers from direct fire. All loose objects
must be removed from the room.
(6) All soldiers within the room must be forward of the rear of the weapon and
must avoid standing in corners or near walls. If possible, they should construct reinforced
positions that can protect them in case the building collapses.
(7) All soldiers in the room must protect their ears when the weapon is fired.
(8) The clearance between the muzzle of the weapon and the opening it is fired
from should be 6 inches for a Dragon and for an M136 AT4.
Figure 12. LAW position.
d. When emplacing the Dragon, the 65-meter minimum firing distance (arming
distance) must be considered.
e. Antitank weapon positions should be reinforced the same as the individual rifle
position, except that no blast wall is erected.
f. When selecting positions for antitank weapons, the flight characteristics of the
________________________________________________________________
I-122
071-326-0550
missiles need to be considered.
Setup: At the test site, provide all the materials and equipment given in the task conditions
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier to prepare an individual or crew-served weapon position.
EVALUATION GUIDE
1. Prepares individual rifle positions.
Results
P
F
a. Barricades the windows.
b. Prepare sand camouflages the loopholes.
c. Prepares sniper positions.
2. Prepares the machine gun positions.
P
F
P
F
a. Avoids doors and windows.
b. Emplaces as low as possible for grazing fire.
c. If field of grazing fire is obstructed, emplaces higher.
3. Prepares the antitank weapon positions.
a. Positions the weapons on the upper stories.
b. Identifies the backblast area.
c. Ensures that the building is structurally sound and can withstand firing.
Results
d. Identifies minimum firing distance for the Dragon.
e. Reinforces the position.
________________________________________________________________
I-123
071-326-0550
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
Related
FM 7-7J
FM 90-10-1
FM 7-8
________________________________________________________________
I-124
071-326-0557
SELECT HASTY FIGHTING POSITIONS IN AN URBAN
ENVIRONMENT
071-326-0557
CONDITIONS
As a member of an attacking or defending unit in urban terrain.
STANDARDS
Select positions from which to place fire on the enemy while using available cover.
CAUTION
abrasions.
NOTE: The success of the mission depends on the ability to place accurate fire on the enemy
with the least possible exposure to return fire. Therefore, constantly seek covered
fighting positions and use them properly.
NOTE: A hasty fighting position is normally occupied in the attack or the early stages of the
defense. It is a position from which the soldier can place fire upon the enemy while
using available cover for protection from return fire. The soldier may occupy it
voluntarily, or he may be forced to occupy it due to enemy fire. In either case, the
________________________________________________________________
I-125
071-326-0557
position lacks preparation before occupation. Some of the more common hasty
fighting positions in a built-up area are: corners of buildings, firing from behind walls,
firing from windows, firing from unprepared loopholes, and firing from the peak of a
roof.
1. Corners. Corners provide cover for a hasty fighting position if used properly.
a. The firer should be capable of firing his weapon around corners without overly
exposing his body to effective return fire.
b. Select a low position to fire from. Another common mistake when firing around
corners is firing from the standing position. The firer exposes himself at the height the enemy
would expect a target to appear, and risks exposing the entire length of his body as a target for
the enemy.
c. Use the prone firing technique when possible.
d. Fire around a wall when possible, not over it (Figure 1). Move away from the
barrier to get a better angle of fire.
Figure 1. Firing around a wall.
e. A technique to reduce exposure when firing around corners or obstacles is to switch
________________________________________________________________
I-126
071-326-0557
the shoulder and eye without changing position of the hands on the weapon. Use the non-firing
eye and shoulder with the firing hand for better stability when firing from a corner that requires
the non-firing side to be exposed. For example, if a right-handed firer were shooting around a
right hand corner, he would still want to expose the SMALLEST target available. Hold the
weapon with firing hand on pistol grip, non-firing hand on hand guards and place the butt into
the opposite shoulder and sight in with the opposite eye. In this manner, the hand positions are
retained, only the position of the butt stock has moved to the opposite shoulder. This provides
limited exposure and retains the muscle memory of the hands when engaging targets.
f. Another method to engage targets while shooting around an opposite corner than
from the firing side is to roll onto the back to engage the target. In this manner, you still retain
the firing eye, hand position, butt stock position on the weapon, and still provide the least
exposure to the enemy.
2. Fire from a window. In a built-up area, windows provide convenient firing ports. Avoid
firing from the standing position since it exposes most of the body to return fire from the enemy
and could silhouette you against a light-colored interior beyond the window. This is an obvious
sign of the firer’s position, especially at night when the muzzle flash can easily be observed. In
using the proper method of firing from a window, stay well back into the room to prevent the
muzzle flash from being seen and kneel to limit exposure and avoid being silhouetted.
a. Select fighting positions that are well back from the window. They help conceal the
body and the rifle's muzzle.
b. Select a kneeling fighting position to minimize exposure and prevent silhouetting.
3. Fire from unprepared loopholes. Fire through a hole torn in the wall and avoid windows.
Stay well back from the loophole so the muzzle of the weapon does not protrude beyond the
wall and the muzzle flash is concealed. Select fighting positions that are well back from the
loophole to conceal the muzzle flash (Figure 2).
4. Fire from the roof. The peak of a roof provides a vantage point for snipers that increases
field of vision and the ranges at which targets can be engaged (Figure 3). A chimney, a
smokestack, or any other object protruding from the roof of a building can reduce the size of
the target exposed and should be used.
________________________________________________________________
I-127
071-326-0557
Figure 2. Firing from loophole.
Figure 3. Soldier firing from peak of roof.
5. No Position Available. When subjected to enemy fire and none of the positions mentioned
above are available, try to expose as little of the body as possible. When in an open area
between buildings (a street or alley) and fired upon by the enemy in one of the buildings to the
front and no cover is available, lie prone as close as possible to a building on the same side of
the open area as the enemy. Make use of the shadows and attempt to present no silhouette
against buildings. To engage, the enemy must then lean out the window and expose himself to
return fire.
________________________________________________________________
I-128
071-326-0557
NOTE: It is not recommended to “hug” the wall because rounds have a tendency to ricochet
and “follow” the wall.
6. Fire from behind urban debris. Many hasty fighting positions can be improvised behind
vehicles and rubble.
7. Subterranean fighting positions. While good hasty fighting positions are difficult to find in
subterranean areas, tunnel intersections and corners as well as ladders and power cabinets may
all be available.
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier to select positions from which he can place fire on the enemy
while using available cover.
EVALUATION GUIDE
1. Fires around a building or wall.
Results
P
F
P
F
a. Uses the left corner.
b. Uses the right corner.
c. Uses the prone firing technique, when possible.
d. Fires around (not over) a wall, when possible.
2. Fires from a window.
a. Selects a position well back from the window.
b. Uses a kneeling firing position.
Results
3. Fires from unprepared loopholes. Selects a position well back from
________________________________________________________________
I-129
071-326-0557
the window.
P
F
4. Fires from a roof.
P
F
5. Fires from behind urban debris.
P
F
6. Makes use of any cover and concealment in subterranean passageways.
P
F
FEEDBACK
Score the soldier GO if all appropriate steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any
steps attempted are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how
to do it correctly.
REFERENCES
Required
FM 7-7J
FM 7-8
Related
FM 90-10-1
________________________________________________________________
I-130
071-SL1-XXX1
EXECUTE BALLISTIC BREACH
071-SL1-XXX1
CONDITIONS
As a member of an assault element in urban terrain with the location and strength of the enemy
uncertain, given an individual weapon with ammunition and load carrying equipment. Given an
additional weapon to conduct the breach with, as required.
STANDARDS
Performs ballistic breach of a man-sized breach (entry) point into a room or building.
NOTE: Ballistic breaching can be conducted not only on doors and windows but also on
walls, ceiling, and floors.
CAUTION
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: When conducting operations in urban
and abrasions.
1. Conduct a breach of a room using an automatic weapon (Figure 1):
a. Evaluate the target and determine where to effect the breach.
________________________________________________________________
I-131
071-SL1-XXX1
Figure 1. Conducting ballistic breach.
b. Weapons Placement and Employment. Position yourself at a 45-degree angle to
the breach (entry) point, this prevents the enemy from firing through the breach (entry) point
and hitting you and limits the possibility of being hit by ricochets.
c. Target. If a door or window, use short bursts of automatic fire aimed at the
locking mechanism. A ballistic breach of a floor, ceiling, or wall is difficult but may not be
impossible, depending on the construction of the building.
d. After Engaging the Target. Kick in or pull out the door, window, or wall section
as per situation. Signal that the breach point has been cleared.
e. Secure and maintain the breach (entry) point.
2. Conduct a breach of a room using a shotgun:
b. Weapons Placement and Employment. Do not stand directly in front of the breach
(entry) point. Hold the butt stock of the shotgun in the pocket of the shoulder. The end of the
barrel is held as close as possible, but not flush against the target.
________________________________________________________________
I-132
071-SL1-XXX1
WARNING
The shotgun should not have a round in the chamber until ready to
shoot. After the transition, the breach man does not always have his
hands on the shotgun (i.e., transitioning to the M4 or M16A2). This
could possibly cause an accidental discharge. The safest way to carry
the shotgun is with the breech closed, hammer forward, chamber empty
(or expended cartridge), and with the safety off.
c. Target. Target either the locking mechanism or the hinges of the door (Figure 2) or
the locking mechanism of the window, or point on the wall, floor, or ceiling susceptible of
being breached.
Figure 2. Engagement locations for shotgun breach.
•
Locking mechanism. The shotgun is aimed down at a 45-degree angle between the
doorknob and the frame firing into the frame. Squeeze off one round, and be
prepared to fire additional rounds.
•
Hinges. Engage the top hinge first. Aim the shotgun to eliminate the maximum
number of screws (holding the hinge onto the door) with one shot. Be prepared to
re-engage the hinge and into the door jam. Once the top hinge is destroyed, move
and engage the middle hinge. Utilize the same technique on the screws. Engage
the bottom hinge last. Because the hinges are often hidden from view, the hinge
breach is more difficult than the locking mechanism breach.
d. After Engaging the Target. Kick in or pull out the door or window or section of
wall, floor, or ceiling as per situation. Signal that the breach point has been cleared.
________________________________________________________________
I-133
071-SL1-XXX1
3. Conduct a breach of a room using an antitank weapon:
b. Weapons Placement and Employment. Position yourself so that the weapon
chosen will arm correctly before impacting on the breach (entry) point.
c. Target. Many AT weapons will pass through doors or windows without producing
the desired affect. A ballistic breach of a wall with an AT weapon is difficult but may not be
impossible, depending on the construction of the building. In many types of construction an
AT weapon will cause great damage to the interior without creating the size breach desired
(Table 1).
d. After Engaging the Target. Kick in or pull out the door, window, or wall section
as per situation. Signal that the breach point has been cleared.
WARNING
AT weapons are not usually recommended for interior breaches due to
the concussive affects of the blast.
TARGET
Firing port or aperture
EFFECT WHEN FIRED AT
TARGET
RECOMMENDED
AIMING POINT
Rounds fired into firing ports or apertures are
wasted; rounds detonate inside on the rear of
Coordinate fire: fire light
antiarmor weapons at a point
________________________________________________________________
I-134
071-SL1-XXX1
Berm
Windows
the position, causing little or no damage to the
position or equipment and personnel unless
hit directly. The AT4 produces less effect
than the M72 LAW does.
Firing at the berm causes the round to
detonate outside the position or in the berm,
producing only a small hole in the berm, but
no damage to the position or equipment and
personnel unless hit directly. The AT4
produces less effect than the M72 LAW does.
The round may travel completely through the
structure before detonating; if not, it causes
dust, minor damage to the rear wall, but no
damage to the position or equipment and
personnel unless they are hit directly. The
AT4 produces less effect than the M72 LAW
does.
Wall
The round detonates on contact, creating
dust, a small hole, and minor structural
damage, but little or no damage to the position
or equipment and personnel unless hit directly.
The LAW may be used to create a loophole
to throw hand grenades through. The AT4
produces less effect than the M72 LAW does.
Corners
Corners are reinforced and thus harder to
penetrate than other parts of the wall. Any
light antiarmor round will detonate sooner on a
corner than on less dense surfaces.
Detonation should occur in the targeted room,
creating dust and overpressure. The
overpressure can temporarily incapacitate
personnel inside the structure near the point of
detonation. The AT4 causes more
overpressure than the M72 LAW does.
6 to 12 inches from the edge
of the aperture or berm
Coordinate fire: fire light
antiarmor weapons at a point
6 to 12 inches from the edge
of the aperture or berm
Fire 6 to 12 inches from the
sides or bottom of a window.
Light antiarmor rounds
explode on contact with
brick and concrete, creating
an opening whose size is
determining by the type of
round used.
round used.
round used.
Table 1. Effects of light antiarmor weapons.
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier to conduct a breach on a wall, ceiling, floor, door, or
window.
________________________________________________________________
I-135
071-SL1-XXX1
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. The soldier is tasked to conduct a breach using an automatic weapon.
P
F
P
F
a. Evaluates the target.
b. Effects the breach.
c. Secures and maintains the breach.
OR
2. The soldier is tasked to conduct a breach using a shotgun:
P F
OR
3. The soldier is tasked to conduct a breach using an AT weapon.
FEEDBACK
Score the soldier a GO if he passes all the task steps. Score the soldier a NO-GO if he failed
any task step. If the soldier scores a NO-GO, show what was done wrong and how to do it
correctly.
REFERENCES
Required
Related
FM 7-7J
FM 90-10-1
FM 7-8
________________________________________________________________
I-136
071-SL1-XXX2
EMPLOY HAND GRENADES IN AN URBAN ENVIRONMENT
071-SL1-XXX2
CONDITIONS
As a member of a unit operating in an urban environment. Being directed to engage targets
given fragmentation, concussion, smoke, and/or an incendiary grenade with time-delay fuses
and load carrying equipment. Given restrictive ROE.
STANDARDS
Kills, captures, or forces the withdrawal of all enemy engaged. Complies with the ROE.
NOTE: Urban environments may require precise application of firepower. This is especially
true where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. The presence of civilians can
restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat power available. Soldiers may have
to operate with "no fire" areas. Rules of engagement (ROE) can prohibit the use of
certain weapons until a specific hostile action takes place. All soldiers must be aware
of the ROE.
CAUTION
and abrasions.
1. Identify the target to engage.
________________________________________________________________
I-137
071-SL1-XXX2
WARNING
If the walls of a building are made of thin material, such as sheetrock or
thin plyboard, the soldier must either lie flat on the floor with his helmet
pointing towards the area of detonation, or move away from any wall
that might be penetrated by grenade fragments if using a fragmentation
grenade or concussion grenade.
R-34, Stun Grenade: To prevent the possibility of fratricide or injury to friendly
inhabitants, soldiers should consider the use of nonlethal stun grenades rather than the
fragmentation grenade.
a. Windows, mouseholes, loopholes. Suppress these positions with grenades when
the ROE permit because they could provide the enemy with access for observation and/or fields
of fire (Figure 1).
Figure 1. Hand grenade being thrown through a loophole.
b. Doorways. Known on the urban battlefield as the fatal funnel, doorways should
be avoided if possible. Because sometimes they cannot be avoided, the assault team may
want to lead with a grenade or distraction device before entering the room if the ROE allow
(Figure 2). This provides the team the elements of surprise and security when explosive
breaches are not used. A similar tactic should be used for window entrances.
________________________________________________________________
I-138
071-SL1-XXX2
Figure 2. Soldier ready to throw grenade after breach of door.
c. Entrances and passages of an underground passageway. Use of all types of
grenades in underground passages presents many dangers. All friendly soldiers should be
above ground when using grenades in the close confines of an underground passageway.
Overpressure, shock, and noise not only can injure friendly soldiers but could also cause
damage or destruction to the tunnel. Smoke will linger in a tunnel for a long period of time.
Large amounts of smoke can displace the oxygen to the point that it is hazardous to soldiers
unless they have forced air respirators.
d. Suspected or likely enemy positions inside a building such as around corners, on
landings of stairs, in deadspace in rubble, etc. (Figure 3). Engaging these positions with
available hand grenades could give you a marked advantage by suppressing the enemy with
fragmentation, smoke or special purpose grenades. When throwing grenades up stairwells,
observation of the grenade is needed to ensure that it does not roll back down the stairs.
Consideration should be given to the use of other than fragmentation grenades in case of such a
rollback.
________________________________________________________________
I-139
071-SL1-XXX2
Figure 3. Soldier tossing grenade up stairway.
e. Throwing a grenade in an upper-story opening (Figure 4). Determine the target
and then step out far enough to lob the grenade. Lobbing can be accomplished underhand or
overhand. This technique should only be employed when the window has been broken.
Otherwise, the chances are high that the thrown grenade will fall back onto the ground without
going into the room. Consideration should be given to the use of other than fragmentation
grenades in case of such an event.
NOTE: The technique of throwing a second grenade immediately after the first when
employed could catch the enemy off-guard.
Figure 4. Hand grenade thrown through window.
2. At all times, the individual throwing the grenade and the rest of his element should have a
planned area to move to for safety if the grenade does not go where intended or if it rolls or falls
________________________________________________________________
I-140
071-SL1-XXX2
back toward them.
3. Determine the type of grenade to use.
WARNING
Composition of the target must be considered when employing
grenades. For instance, the inside walls of a building are usually not
heavily constructed and can be easily penetrated by the fragments of
an M67 fragmentation grenade. If the target is composed of flammable
items, fires could start with the use of grenades of all types.
________________________________________________________________
I-141
071-SL1-XXX2
a. M67 Fragmentation (Figure 5). Used to disable or kill personnel. Grenade
explodes 4 to 5 seconds after safety lever is released. The effective casualty-producing radius
is 15 meters.
WARNING
Although the killing radius is 5 meters and the casualty producing
radius of this grenade is 15 meters, fragments can disperse as far
away as 230 meters.
Figure 5. M67 Fragmentation Grenade.
________________________________________________________________
I-142
071-SL1-XXX2
b. MK3A2 Offensive Grenade (Figure 6). This grenade is commonly referred to as
the concussion grenade, and is designed to produce casualties during close combat while
minimizing danger to friendly personnel. The grenade is also used for concussion effects in
enclosed areas, for blasting, or for demolition tasks. The shock waves (overpressure)
produced by this grenade when used in enclosed areas are greater than those produced by the
fragmentation grenade. It is, therefore, very effective against enemy soldiers located in
bunkers, buildings, and fortified areas. The effective casualty radius in open areas is 2 meters.
Secondary missiles and bits of fuze may be projected as far as 200 meters from the detonation
point.
Figure 6. MK3A2 Offensive Grenade.
________________________________________________________________
I-143
071-SL1-XXX2
c. M18 Colored Smoke (Figure 7). The grenade produces a cloud of colored smoke
for 50 to 90 seconds. The colors of smoke are: red, green, yellow, and violet. This
grenade can be used for signaling and screening.
Figure 7. M18 Colored Smoke Grenade.
________________________________________________________________
I-144
071-SL1-XXX2
d. AN-M8 HC White Smoke (Figure 8). The grenade emits a dense cloud of white
smoke for 105 to 150 seconds.
WARNING
Any damaged AN-M8 HC grenades that expose the filler are hazardous.
Exposure of the filler to moisture and air could result in a chemical
reaction that will ignite the grenade.
WARNING
The AN-M8 HC Hand grenade produces harmful Hydrochloric fumes that
irritate the eyes, throat, and lungs. It should not be used in closed-in
areas unless soldiers are wearing protective masks.
Figure 8. AN-M8 HC White Smoke Grenade.
WARNING
With both the AN-M8 and M18, there is the danger of starting a fire if
used in a dry area.
NOTE: Smoke will linger in a tunnel for a long period of time. It will certainly confuse the
enemy and in dense concentrations, it can displace oxygen to the point where it can
constitute a danger. This is a double-edged weapon. Protective masks may be of
little use against smoke grenades because the smoke displaces oxygen. Large
________________________________________________________________
I-145
071-SL1-XXX2
amounts of smoke can displace the oxygen to the point that it is hazardous to soldiers
unless they have forced air respirators.
e. M15 White Phosphorous (Figure 9). The M15 grenade is a bursting type grenade.
The grenade has a bursting radius of 17 meters. The WP filler burns for about 60 seconds at
a temperature of 5,000 degrees Fahrenheit. This intense heat causes the smoke produced by
the grenade to rise quite rapidly, especially in cool climates. This makes the M15 grenade less
desirable for use as a screening agent.
Figure 9. M15 WP Smoke Hand Grenade.
WARNING
All friendly personnel within this 17-meter area should be in a covered
position to avoid being struck by burning particles. Careful consideration
must be given prior to the use of the white phosphorus grenade inside an
enclosed space as it spreads, ignites, and burns in the air and could
cause extreme burns to the body. These grenades should be used with
extreme caution, as no immediate follow-up is possible. WP burns up all
available oxygen.
4. Attain the best body-target alignment possible. Other unit members must provide security
for the thrower. Keep the individual weapon in the nonthrowing hand so it can be used if
needed. The individual weapon should never be laid down in an urban environment, where the
possibility of surprise by the enemy is so great.
________________________________________________________________
I-146
071-SL1-XXX2
NOTE: The average soldier, depending on the throwing position, target to be engaged, and
contact with the enemy, can throw any of the above mentioned grenades 20 to 40
meters.
5. Prepare the grenade for throwing. Straighten the cotter pin, remove the grenade's safety
clip, and pull the pin.
6. Cook off the grenade, if needed. Different types of grenades have different detonation
delays. To cook the grenade off, release the safety lever, count by thousands for the
appropriate delay (one thousand and one, one thousand and two) and then throw the grenade
towards the target. The cook off delay prevents the enemy from grabbing the grenade and
tossing it back.
WARNING
Grenades should be cooked off only in combat situations, where a
thrown grenade might be picked up by opposing forces and thrown
back at friendly personnel.
7. Throw the grenade. Depending upon the type of target, type of grenade and safety
requirements for friendly forces, use any of the following methods:
•
Overarm throwing.
•
Throwing using low cover.
•
Underarm lobbing.
•
Throwing like a stone (sidearm delivery and/or skipping a stone).
•
Flipping or dropping in place.
WARNING
After throwing a grenade, the soldier must immediately announce "frag
out" to indicate that a grenade has been thrown. He then takes cover
since the grenade may bounce back or be thrown back or the enemy
may fire at him.
Setup: At the test site, provide the soldier with five dummy grenades to engage the targets.
________________________________________________________________
I-147
071-SL1-XXX2
Some of these grenades must be of the canister type such as smoke, WP, or concussion.
Provide targets of troops in a building, troops in an upper story room, or an open area that
needs to be obscured.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier to fasten the grenades to the ammunition pouches on his LCE or
elsewhere in his equipment, as appropriate. Tell the soldier that he must be able to correctly
select the type of grenade to be used IAW the situation and the ROE. Tell the soldier not to
expose himself to the target for more than 3 seconds at any one time.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measure
Results
1. Identifies the target to engage.
P
F
2. Selects the appropriate grenade for the target.
P
F
3. Attains the best body target alignment possible. The individual weapon
should be kept in the non-throwing hand.
P
F
P
F
a. Windows, mouseholes, loopholes.
b. Doorways.
c. Entrances to underground passageways.
d. Suspected or likely enemy positions inside a building.
4. Cooks off grenade, if appropriate.
P
F
5. Has a designated area to move to for safety if the grenade
does not go where intended.
6. Engages targets with grenades with more characteristics in mind.
a. Either lays flat on the floor with helmet pointing towards
the area of detonation, or moves away from any wall that might be
penetrated by grenade fragments.
Performance Measure
P
F
Results
b. Throws grenades in an opening before entering a building.
c. Throws grenades onto stairway landings upward or downward
________________________________________________________________
I-148
071-SL1-XXX2
to suppress suspected enemy.
d. Throws a grenade in an upper-story opening.
(1) Determines target, and then steps out far enough
to lob the grenade.
(2) Lobs the grenade either underhand or overhand.
FEEDBACK
Score the soldier GO if all performance measures are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if
any performance measure is failed. If the soldier scores NO-GO, show the soldier what was
done wrong.
REFERENCES
Required
FM 23-30
FM 7-7J
FM 7-8
TM 9-1330-200-12
Related
FM 90-10-1
________________________________________________________________
I-149
071-SL1-XXX3
USE NONVERBAL COMMUNICATIONS TECHNIQUES IN AN
URBAN ENVIRONMENT
071-SL1-XXX3
CONDITIONS
As a member of a squad in urban terrain with the enemy location and strength uncertain, given
an individual weapon with ammunition, load-bearing equipment, paragraph 5 of FRAGOs
and/or OPORDs, unit SOP and SOI.
STANDARDS
Recognize, react to, and demonstrate nonverbal signals
NOTE: All nonverbal signals should be reinforced by leader’s actions if tactically sound.
CAUTION
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: When clearing debris and preparing or
improving fighting positions inside buildings, squad members should use special protective
gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts and abrasions.
1. Use nonverbal communications techniques that include:
a. Visual signals such as hand and arm signals, pyrotechnics, panel markers, and
lights. This can also include leading by example.
b. Audio signals such as whistles and weapon’s reports.
________________________________________________________________
I-150
071-SL1-XXX3
c. Physical signals such as squeezing the shoulder of the soldier in front of you.
NOTE: Ensure prearranged meanings for nonverbal communications for them to be useful.
They must be rehearsed and understood by all. These signals can be found in unit
SOPs, paragraph 5 of both FRAGOs and OPORDs, and in SOIs.
2. Use hand and arm signals to control the movement and actions of individuals, teams, and
squads. These signals are also used by combat support and combat service support elements
organized for infantry missions. Examples of items for which hand signals are required are:
a. Conduct the breach.
b. The room is clear.
c. Prepared to conduct breach.
d. To designate a specific soldier to cover a specific area.
e. To assign sectors or order of march.
f. Throw a grenade.
g. Weapon malfunction.
NOTE: All visual signals should be performed using the non-firing hand whenever possible.
The firing hand is for that purpose; the non-firing hand is for opening things,
throwing grenades, or signaling.
3. Pyrotechnics used can include:
a. Smoke grenades. White phosphorous and HC smoke grenades emit a white
colored smoke, and the M18 colored smoke grenades use the colors Green, Yellow, Red,
and Violet. Smoke signals are visible over greater distances when employed against a terrain
background of contrasting color.
b. Handheld signal rockets. These devices come in two types, Star Parachutes and
Star Clusters. They are used most at night but can also be used during the day.
(1) Star Parachutes. They are issued in an expendable launcher that consists
of a launching tube and firing cap. These signals produce a single parachute-suspended
illuminant star. Star parachutes are available in green, red, and white.
________________________________________________________________
I-151
071-SL1-XXX3
(2) Star Clusters. They are issued in an expendable launcher that consists of
a launching tube and a firing cap. These signals produce a cluster of five free falling pyrotechnic
stars. Star clusters are also available in green, red, and white.
c. All these pyrotechnic signaling techniques are interchangeable with each other.
They can be used to mark or signal the following:
•
Progress.
•
Landing areas.
•
Building cleared.
•
Begin an assault or attack.
•
Withdraw.
•
Begin final protective fire.
•
Marking positions.
•
Illuminating target areas.
•
Next unit move forward.
•
Halt progress.
4. Panel markers. Use panel markers to mark the progress of a clearing team by hanging the
panel out the window of the last room or floor cleared. Panel markers can also be used to
mark friendly vehicles or positions so that they are easily identified by supporting units.
5. Lights. Lights can be used in various methods. Red lens or multi-colored flashlights,
white light such as from an unfiltered flashlight, IR sources such as the IR light of PVS-7Bs or
BUD lights. Even the light emitted from equipment such as the AN/PAQ-4 can be used as a
signaling device.
6. Audio. Use audio signals such as whistles and weapons’ reports for signaling. However,
increased noise of an urban battlefield makes the effective use of sound signals difficult.
Examples of audio are:
•
Explosion that signals the beginning of an attack.
• A preset series of whistle sounds to move a fire team up, back, left, and right.
________________________________________________________________
I-152
071-SL1-XXX3
7. Physical signals. Physical signals are signals that are given by direct contact. These signals
are almost always sent from the back of a formation forward while everyone’s focus is to the
front. Examples of physical signals:
•
Squeeze on the shoulder of the soldier in front of you while stacked to enter a room
to signal you are ready.
•
A tap on a soldier’s shoulder to gain his attention when it is other than where you
are.
statement.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Recognizes, reacts to, and gives the types of visual signaling.
P
F
2. Recognizes, reacts to, and gives the types of audio signaling.
P
F
3. Recognizes, reacts to, and gives the types of physical signals.
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
FM 7-7J
FM 7-8
Related
FM 21-60
________________________________________________________________
I-153
071-SL1-XXX4
ENGAGE TARGETS IN AN URBAN ENVIRONMENT USING
REFLEXIVE FIRING TECHNIQUES
071-SL1-XXX4
CONDITIONS
uncertain, given an individual weapon with ammunition and load-bearing equipment. Given
STANDARDS
Move with assigned individual weapon. Scan for targets. Discriminate among enemy,
friendly, and noncombatants. Successfully engage targets. Comply with ROE
CAUTION
and abrasions.
1. Move with assigned individual weapon. Utilize one of the two weapons carrying
techniques in an urban environment.
a. Individual Movement and Weapon Control.
•
When moving, hold their weapon with the muzzle pointed in the direction of travel.
Place the butt of the rifle or carbine into the pocket of the shoulder and point the
________________________________________________________________
I-154
071-SL1-XXX4
muzzle slightly down to allow for unobstructed vision. Use the firing hand for that
purpose only; use the non-firing hand to open things, for signaling, or to throw
grenades.
•
Shooting is done while moving toward the point of domination. Shots are taken as
close to the target as 1 or 2 inches. Because shots are taken while the clearing
team members are moving, it is essential to use a "careful hurry" as opposed to
rushing in with total disregard to any obstructions that may litter the floors just to get
to the points of domination. The most important point is to lead with the weapon,
not with the body. Do not move faster than targets can accurately be engaged.
R-24, Frangible Ammunition: To prevent the possibility of fratricide or injury to friendly
inhabitants, leaders should consider the use of 5.56 and 7.62 Controlled Penetration
Ammunition (CPA) “Soft Round” which will penetrate human bodies/walls and then stop
either in the body or in the wall.
WARNING__________________________________________
__
Because frangible ammunition disintegrates upon impact with any
surface harder than the projectile itself, safety glasses should be worn
to protect eyes from fragments.
NOTE: Use of frangible ammunition will prevent firing through objects (furniture, walls,
etc.). An enemy not equipped with frangible ammunition will not be so limited. This could
place the unit at a severe disadvantage.
•
Avoid "flagging," or leading, with the weapon when working around windows,
doors, corners, or areas where obstacles must be negotiated. Flagging the
weapon gives advance warning to anyone looking in that direction, making it easier
for an enemy to grab the weapon or to react to the appearance of the clearing team.
Keep the weapon under control at all times.
b. Weapon Ready Positions. When moving in buildings or rooms there are two
weapons carrying techniques that are used for the M-16A2 or M4 in order to prevent injuries
to friendly personnel. These techniques are “low ready” and “high ready”.
(1) Low ready position. The butt of the weapon is placed firmly in the pocket
of the shoulder with the barrel pointed down at a 45-degree angle. This is the safest ready
position. It should be used while clearing rooms, except when actually entering and clearing
(Figure 1).
(2) High ready position. The butt of the weapon is held under the armpit,
________________________________________________________________
I-155
071-SL1-XXX4
with the barrel pointed slightly up, keeping the front sight assembly under the line of sight but
within peripheral vision. To engage a target, push the weapon out as if to bayonet the target.
When the weapon leaves the armpit, slide it up into the firing shoulder. This technique is best
suited for the lineup outside the door (Figure 2).
c. Stance. The feet are approximately shoulder-width apart. Toes are pointed
straight to the front (direction of movement). The firing side foot is slightly staggered to the rear
of the non-firing side foot. Knees are slightly bent and the upper body leans slightly forward.
Shoulders are not rolled or slouched. The firing side elbow is kept in against the body. The
stance should be modified to ensure that the soldier maintains a comfortable boxer stance.
When engaging targets, the soldier holds the weapon with the butt in the pocket of his shoulder.
Figure 1. The low ready position Figure 2. The high ready position.
2. Target Discrimination. Detect targets in your assigned sector and discriminate between
enemy and friendly. If there are multiple targets, determine the most immediate threat first, and
engage that threat. After engaging the first threat, transition to next immediate threats and so on until
the engagement is complete. Be prepared to reengage targets that are left still standing or trying to resist.
NOTE: Target discrimination is the act of distinguishing between threat and non-threat
personnel during combat in close quarters. Even if an objective is known to be free
________________________________________________________________
I-156
071-SL1-XXX4
of noncombatants, other soldiers and friendly units moving through the objective area
may be mistaken for enemy. Target discrimination is an inescapable responsibility.
Proper target discrimination instills fire control as well ensuring the safety of all friendly
forces.
3. Engage enemy targets in your assigned sector using one of four aiming techniques.
Consistently place shots that will immediately incapacitate the enemy. Engage targets using a
trigger manipulation technique. Conduct immediate action upon malfunction.
NOTE: Reflexive Shooting Techniques. Due to the very nature of a close quarters combat
encounters, engagements will be very close (within 10 meters) and very fast (target
exposed for only a few seconds). Most close quarters engagements are won by
who hits first and puts the enemy down. It is more important to knock a man down
as soon as possible than it is to kill him. In order to win a close quarters
engagement, soldiers must make quick, accurate shots by mere reflex. This is
accomplished by the proper application of reflexive firing techniques. This method of
shooting is the only way for the clearing team members to consistently succeed with
the least casualties.
a. Aim. The following four aiming techniques all have their place during combat in
built-up areas.
•
Slow aimed fire. This technique is the most accurate. It consists of taking up a
steady, properly aligned sight picture and squeezing off rounds. It is normally used
for engagements beyond 25 meters or when the need for accuracy overrides speed.
•
Rapid Aimed Fire (Flash Sight Picture). This technique features an imperfect sight
picture where windage is critical and elevation is of lesser importance. When the
front sight post is in line with the target, squeeze the trigger. This technique is used
against targets from 0 - 25 meters and at a fast rate of fire.
•
Aimed Quick Kill. This consists of placing the front sight post flush on top of the
rear aperture sight. This is used for very quick shots from 0 - 11 meters. Again,
windage is important, but elevation is not as critical with relation to the target.
•
Instinctive fire. This is the least accurate technique. Focus on the target and point
the weapon in the general direction using muscle memory reflex to fire.
A
technique is to adjust the placement of the non-firing hand for accuracy. While
gripping the handguard, extend the index finger down the barrel so that by pointing
the index finger toward the target, the barrel is automatically on line.
b. Shot Placement. When clearing a room, incapacitate enemy soldiers immediately.
Shots that merely wound or that are mortal but do not incapacitate the target instantaneously
________________________________________________________________
I-157
071-SL1-XXX4
are only slightly better than clean misses.
NOTE: Two fundamentals are essential to success for reflexive firing techniques:
•
Always fire until the enemy goes down.
•
All reflexive firing will be with both eyes open.
(1) Concentrate on achieving solid, well-placed hits to the target. These can
be achieved by aiming and striking a target center of mass.
(2) The only shot placement that guarantees immediate and total incapacitation
is one roughly centered in the face, below the middle of the forehead, and above the upper lip.
This shot placement is difficult. Therefore, this location is not recommended.
(3) Shots to the center of the chest that enter the lung/heart region are normally
fatal but may take several seconds to incapacitate the target. During this time, the opponent
may be able to return effective fire. Military equipment or protective vests may also shield this
region of the body. This protective equipment can often deflect or absorb rounds and prevent
immediate incapacitation. However, impacts to this region will give the desired effect of
incapacitating the target. Adhere to one of the reflexive firing fundamentals: fire until the
enemy goes down.
c. Trigger Manipulation. It is important to know the capabilities of the weapon and
control fires while engaging targets.
(1) Double Tap. There is a natural arc of the front sight post after the round is
fired and the recoil kicks in. Let the barrel go with this arc and immediately bring the front sight
post back on target and take a second shot without acquiring a sight picture. Do not fight the
recoil. Continue to shoot until the enemy goes down.
(2) Controlled Pair. There is a natural arc of the front sight post after the
round is fired and the recoil kicks in. Let the barrel go with this arc and immediately bring the
front sight post back on target and take a second shot, after acquiring a sight picture. Do
not fight the recoil. Continue to shoot until the enemy goes down.
(3) Automatic Fire. Automatic fire is an option in a close quarters’ combat
environment. It is effective for violence of action when fire superiority is needed to gain entry.
Automatic fire is fired in controlled bursts only (2-3 rounds). Once properly trained, a soldier
will be able to fire six rounds (two bursts) in the same time than he could fire two rounds in a
controlled pair. The accuracy when engaging targets at less than 10 meters is nearly equal.
During a room clearing operation, consideration of use of automatic fire must be made. The
major disadvantages are the amount of ammunition expenditure and slightly less control of fire.
________________________________________________________________
I-158
071-SL1-XXX4
This technique should normally be limited to the first and second men entering a room due to the
possibility of a stray round. However, the M249 gunner has no choice but to become
proficient in this technique and he may be used in any entry position. The same fundamentals
are used as in the rapid-aim fire, aimed quick kill, or instinctive fire. The weapon will rise
during the engagement, the soldier must let it. Aim point is slightly down and left to account for
this action. A technique to ensure accuracy is to concentrate on not jerking the trigger, a
tendency when firing automatic.
d. Malfunctions. If your weapon malfunctions during any close quarters combat,
immediately take a knee to perform immediate action except when in a doorway, a staircase,
and so on. In such a situation, seek cover, if possible and get out of the way of the others
team members. Once the malfunction is cleared, there is no need to stand up to engage
targets. Save precious seconds by continuing to engage from one knee. Whenever other
members of the team see a soldier take a knee, they must automatically clear his sector of fire.
Before rising, warn the clearing team members of movement and only rise after they
acknowledge. This will minimize the chance of fratricide among team members. Another
technique would be to remain in place until after the engagement when another team member
comes by to signal to arise.
statement.
EVALUATION GUIDE
1. Demonstrates two weapons carrying techniques inside building.
Results
P
F
a. High ready.
b. Low ready.
________________________________________________________________
I-159
071-SL1-XXX4
2. Engages enemy targets, does not engage noncombatants or friendly forces. P
F
3. Engages targets using aiming techniques.
P
F
P
F
6. Continues to fire until target goes down.
P
F
7. Clears malfunctions.
P
F
a. Slow aimed fire.
b. Rapid aimed fire.
c. Aimed quick kill.
d. Instinctive fire.
4. Engages targets using appropriate trigger control method.
5. Demonstrates shot placement to incapacitate the enemy.
P
.
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
FM 7-7J
FM 7-8
Related
FM 90-10-1
________________________________________________________________
I-160
071-SL1-XXX6
UTILIZE A HYDRAULIC BREACHING DEVICE
(HYDRA-RAM)
071-SL1-XXX6
CONDITIONS
uncertain, given an individual weapon with ammunition and load bearing equipment. Given a
complete hydraulic breaching device (HYDRA-RAM) and a pry bar.
STANDARDS
Perform mechanical breach of door into a room.
CAUTION__________________________________________
__
Prolonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to
soldiers.
and abrasions.
1. Remove the hydraulic breaching device (HYDRA-RAM) components from the carrying
case and inspect them.
a. HYDRA-RAM.
b. Rubber Mallet.
c. Instructional Manual, if needed.
________________________________________________________________
I-161
071-SL1-XXX6
CAUTION
The pump handle is under some pressure when in the lock position.
Releasing the pump handle lock without holding in place with the hands may
cause an injury.
2. Insert closed jaws of the operating head into the space where the door comes up against the
doorjamb and stops near the main lock. Simple hand pressure will usually effect a quiet and full
insertion between the door and the rabbet or stop.
a. When the space is too tight for hand insertion, have another soldier place a pry bar
in between the doorjamb and the door and force enough space to insert the jaws in between.
b. When noise is not a factor, the jaws can be forced into place by striking the jaws
on the striker plate using the rubber mallet.
3. Hold the pump handle against the hydraulic pump housing while unlocking the rear release
lock.
4. Pump the hydraulic handle until the locks of the door are forced away from the doorjamb
and entry can be made.
CAUTION
Personnel may be injured by the HYDRA-RAM falling when door opens.
Ensure personnel hold it by the handle while operating.
a. If a door has multiple locks, the jaws may need to be moved to force the remainder
of the locks open to allow access into the room.
b. If further attempts must be made to open the door, press the hydraulic pressure
release lever to release built-up pressure in the pump.
CAUTION
Ensure that your hands and fingers are clear of the jaws as they close. The
jaws closing can cause injury.
5. After the breach has been made, press the pressure release lever to release the pressure
and relock the pump handle.
________________________________________________________________
I-162
071-SL1-XXX6
6. Place all components of the hydraulic breaching device HYDRA-RAM back into the
carrying case.
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that the hydraulic breaching device (HYDRA-RAM) can breach
most any type of door but for this evaluation only one type of door will be used.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Removes all components from the carrying case.
P
F
2. Inserts jaws between door and doorjamb securely.
P
F
3. Unlocks pump handle.
P
F
4. Pumps until door separates from doorjamb.
P
F
5. Releases pressure from the jaws by pressing the pressure release lever
P
F
6. Relocks pump handle.
P
F
7. Places all components back in the carrying case.
P
F
8. Perform all steps without injury or damage to equipment.
P
F
FEEDBACK
any task step.
REFERENCES
Required
None
Related
None
________________________________________________________________
I-163
071-SL1-XXX7
UTILIZE A RIFLE LAUNCHED ENTRY MUNITION FOR
BREACHING WINDOWS, DOORS, AND WALLS
071-SL1-XXX7
CONDITIONS
As a member of an assault or breaching element in urban terrain with the enemy location and
strength uncertain, given an M16, M4, or M203 with a magazine of ammunition and a
magazine of special crimped cartridges, a Rifle Launched Entry Munition (RLEM) round, and
load-bearing equipment. Note that the Rifle Launched Entry Munition (RLEM) will not fit on
the barrel the M4/M203.
STANDARDS
Perform breach of an entry point (window or door) to gain access into a room or building.
CAUTION____________________________________
soldiers.
and abrasions.
1. Identify the target (window or door) for remote breaching with the RLEM round.
________________________________________________________________
I-164
071-SL1-XXX7
R-8, Remote Marking Munitions: Consider the use of the M203 TPT round as a
remote marking munition to identify the entry point for breaching.
WARNING
The M203 TPT round has a metal projectile body that can ricochet and
cause injuries
WARNING
Firer must be a minimum of 10 meters from target to safely employ a
150-gram round.
NOTE: Exact minimum safe distance for firers and assault elements have not
been established for each type of round.
2. Select the appropriate RLEM round for the point of breach (Table 1).
TYPE OF ROUND
50 GRAM
TARGET
Solid wooden door or window.
Solid metal doors opening inward.
150 GRAM
Solid metal doors opening outward.
Table 1. Type of Round vs. Size of Target.
NOTES: 1. An RLEM round of any size is usually ineffective on hollow wooden doors.
2. More than one RLEM round may be required to effect the breach.
3. Perform prefire safety checks of the RLEM round before loading (Figure 1). Inspect the
rounds (including the stand-off rods) for any:
a. Cracks.
b. Punctures.
c. Dents.
d. Crushed or flattened parts.
________________________________________________________________
I-165
071-SL1-XXX7
ROUND
STAND OFF ROD
Figure 1. Components of RLEM round.
4. If any defects are found, do not use that round.
a. Replace unsuitable rounds.
b. Continue with mission.
c. As soon as possible, notify chain of command of location and description of the
damaged round.
d. Dispose of any damaged rounds by unit SOP.
5. Assume a good covered and/or concealed firing position.
6. Assemble the round. Screw stand-off rod into the housing portion of the round (Figure 2).
________________________________________________________________
I-166
071-SL1-XXX7
Figure 2. Assembly of round.
7. Prior to loading a magazine of special crimped cartridge ammunition, unload the 5.56-mm
ammunition magazine and clear the weapon in accordance with STP 21-1-SMCT Task # 071311-2028, Unload an M16 A1 or A2 rifle.
8. Load a magazine of special crimped cartridge ammunition into the weapon, chamber a
round, and place the weapon on safe.
9. Insert the tail end of the RLEM round over the front end of the rifle barrel. Continue to
slide the round down the barrel until it stops at the front sight post or until it will slide no further
along the barrel. Ensure the round sits snugly on the end of barrel (Figure 3).
Figure 3. Slide the Round over the weapon barrel.
________________________________________________________________
I-167
071-SL1-XXX7
WARNING
5.56-mm ball ammunition will damage the RLEM producing an
unexploded explosive hazard
WARNING
If movement is conducted with the round loaded , ensure the round
seating is checked again before firing. The round could slide away from
the end of the barrel and affect firing performance.
NOTE: The RLEM may slip off of the weapon barrel if not held in an upward position.
10. Aim the RLEM round at the selected target. For aiming point vs. firing distance see Table
2 and Figure 4
DISTANCE FROM TARGET
10-15 METERS
20 METERS
30 METERS
40 METERS
AIMING POINT
15-20 inches above center mass of target.
40 inches above center mass of target.
(top of door)
80 inches above center mass of targets.
(½ door height above top of door)
160 inches above center mass of targets.
(1 door height above top of door)
Table 2. Point of Aim.
NOTE: There are two types of crimped cartridge ammunition. This point of aim information
is for the first. No data has been provided for the second other than the second is a
higher power cartridge. That changes the point of aim to a lower point. The point
of aim will also likely be different if and when a bullet trap munition is produced.
________________________________________________________________
I-168
071-SL1-XXX7
Figure 4. Point of Aim.
a. During periods of normal visibility standard weapons sights may be used to aim the
round.
b. During periods of limited visibility the target may be engaged using any of the
methods listed below:
•
The firer engages the target using the combination of his own target designator such
as the PAQ-4 and AN/PVS-7 goggles. This entails that the target designator can
illuminate over the circumference of the round at the end of the weapon. This
method should be possible if the designator is mounted with the proper mount.
•
The firer uses his iron sights with no illumination or night fighting capabilities.
•
The firer uses something to illuminate his iron sights such as the liquid from a
chemical light stick or tritium dots.
•
The firer uses his iron sights while the target is being illuminated with white light
provided by another soldier.
•
The firer uses an M68 close quarters optic while the target is being illuminated with
white light provided by another soldier.
•
The firer uses his AN/PVS-7 Night Vision Goggles and no target designator. This
requires the soldier to fire the round using the Instinctive Aiming technique (Muscle
Memory).
________________________________________________________________
I-169
•
071-SL1-XXX7
The firer uses artificial illumination, (for example flares, star parachutes, a thrown
chemical light stick vicinity of the door, streetlights) and his iron sights to engage the
target.
NOTE: When the firer uses his own aiming point designators, the MILES adapter bracket
issued with the designator must be used to prevent the RLEM from obscuring the
designation.
11. Take the weapon off safe.
12. Squeeze the trigger on command or at prearranged time.
13. In case of a weapon misfire, remove the RLEM from the weapon and conduct misfire
procedures in accordance with STP 21-1-SMCT Task # 071-311-2029, Correct
Malfunctions of an M16A1 or M16A2 Rifle.
14. If the RLEM round launches but does not explode on impact, treat as an unexploded
explosive device and contact EOD or dispose of by Unit SOP.
15. Be prepared to engage the target multiple times until a breach is effected.
statement. Blank ammunition may be substituted for ball and an RLEM training round. Soft
targets should be used with the RLEM training round.
element in urban terrain.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Identifies target.
P
2. Selects appropriate RLEM round.
P
F
3. Performs prefire safety precautions. Inspects for (including
the stand-off rod):
F
Results
P
F
________________________________________________________________
I-170
071-SL1-XXX7
a. Cracks.
b. Punctures.
c. Dents.
d. Crushed or flattened parts.
4. If any defects are found, does not use that round.
P
F
P
F
a. Replaces the unsuitable round..
b. Continues with mission and notifies chain of command
of location and description of the damaged round.
5. Assumes a good covered and/or concealed firing position.
6. Assembles the round.
P
F
8. Loads special ammunition magazine.
P
F
9. Ensures a blank round is chambered and the weapon is on safe.
P
F
10. Places round on barrel of weapon and slides along barrel
until rounds stops.
P
F
12. Performs misfire procedures, if necessary.
P
F
13. Firer hits the target
P
F
7. Unloads magazine.
P
11. Aims and fires the round.
P
F
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
Related
________________________________________________________________
I-171
Technology Profile
Proprietary Information
071-SL1-XXX7
FM 90-10-1
FM 7-7J
FM 7-8
________________________________________________________________
I-172
071-SL1-XXX8
EXECUTE A MECHANICAL BREACH
071-SL1-XXX8
CONDITIONS
uncertain, given an individual weapon with ammunition and load bearing equipment. Given
special tools such as prying tools, striking tools, and cutting tools as required for each task.
STANDARDS
Perform a mechanical breach of an entry point into a room
NOTE: Mechanical breaching of a room can be conducted not only on doors and windows
but also walls, ceilings, and floors.
CAUTION
and abrasions.
1. Inspect, inventory, and select the proper tools.
a. Prying tools. Hand prying tools use leverage to provide a mechanical advantage.
These tools are very effective in breaking locks, opening doors, and forcing windows. The
Hooligan’s tool, crowbars, and various pry bars are all types of prying tools. Accessories
such as wedges can help to get another “bite” when using prying tools.
________________________________________________________________
I-173
071-SL1-XXX8
b. Striking tools. Usually are characterized by large, weighted heads on handles,
which are the most common and basic striking tools. This category of tool includes battering
rams, sledgehammers, hammers, and picks.
c. Cutting tools. These tools are the most diversified of the tool groups. However,
most cutting tools are designed to cut only specific types of materials. Cutting tools may be
either manual or powered.
WARNING
Use of cutting tools on the wrong type of materials can be a safety
hazard, such as cutting through wood and hitting metal with a chainsaw.
The operator could be harmed and possibly cause damage to the tool.
2. Evaluate the target.
a. Doors. From a soldiers standpoint of forcible entry, doors may be classified as
either swinging, revolving, sliding, or overhead. Regardless of the type of door, once the
door has been checked for booby traps, soldiers should first check to see if the door is locked
before force is used.
(1) Swinging doors. Door locks and fasteners for swinging doors consist of a
bolt or bar that protrudes from the door into a metal keeper into the doorjamb. This bolt or
bar may or may not be a part of the lock assembly. In either case, to force open the door the
jamb must be sprung enough to permit the bolt to pass the keeper.
(a) When breaching a door that opens outward (Figure 1), follow
these steps:
•
Step 1. Insert the blade of the prying tool between the door and
the jamb near the lock.
•
Step 2. Force the blade in and against the rabbet or door (the
center frame of the doorway) stop by working and pushing on the
tool (the tool can be hammered with a striking tool).
•
Step 3. Pry the tool bar away from the door to force the door
and doorjamb apart.
•
Step 4. Pull the door open or pry open with another tool when the
lock clears the keeper.
________________________________________________________________
I-174
071-SL1-XXX8
Figure 1. Forcing a door that opens out.
(b) When breaching a door that opens inward from the soldier (Figure
2), follow these steps.
•
Step 1. Bump the cutting edge of the tool against the rabbet or
doorstop (the center frame of the doorway) to break the varnish or
paint so that the blade can be inserted.
•
Step 2. Loosen the stop or remove the stop completely.
•
Step 3. Start the blade between the door and the doorjamb.
•
Step 4. Make the initial pry only after the blade is halfway in, to
permit the blade to be worked and pushed.
•
Step 5. With a full bite behind the door, pry the door away from
jamb until the bolt passes the keeper.
________________________________________________________________
I-175
071-SL1-XXX8
Figure 2. Top view of forcing a door that opens inward.
(2) Double swinging doors. Double swinging doors may be forced with most
pry tools by prying the two doors sufficiently apart at the lock to permit the lock bolt to pass the
keeper.
(3) Revolving doors. Revolving doors consist of wings that revolve around a
central shaft. The revolving wings turn within a metal or glass housing that is on each side and
through which individuals may travel as the door is turned. The mechanism of the revolving
door is usually collapsible and panic-proof, and each of the four revolving wings is held in
position when the hangers are collapsed. Some revolving doors will collapse automatically
when forces are exerted in opposite directions on any two wings.
(4) There are three basic types of revolving doors.
(a) Panic proof type. The panic proof, collapsible mechanism has a
¼ inch cable holding the wings apart. To collapse the wings push or press the mechanism or
wing in opposite directions.
(b) Drop arm type. The drop arm mechanism has a solid arm passing
through one of the doors. A pawl will be found on the door through which the arm passes.
To collapse the mechanism, press the pawl to disengage it from the arm and then push the wing
to one side.
(c) Metal braced type. The metal braced mechanism is held in
position by arms that resemble a gate hook with an eye. To collapse the mechanism, it is
necessary to lift the hook and fasten it back against the fixed door or wing. The hooks are
located on both sides of the door. The pivots are, in most cases, cast iron and can be
broken by forcing the door with a bar that pivots. Revolving doors may be locked in various
________________________________________________________________
I-176
071-SL1-XXX8
ways, and in general, they are difficult to force when locked.
(5) Sliding doors. Sliding doors are generally considered to be those doors
that can travel either right or left of their opening and on the same plane. Sliding doors are
usually supported on metal tracks, and their sideward movement is made easier by small rollers
or guide wheels. These doors may be forced similarly to swinging doors except they must be
pried straight backwards from the lock.
(6) Over head doors. Overhead doors may be constructed of metal,
fiberglass, or wood. There are three types of overhead doors.
(a) Sectional or folding doors. From a forcible entry point of view the
sectional or folding door does not present a serious problem unless it is motor driven or remote
controlled. The latch is usually in the center of the door, and it controls the locks on either side
of the door. The lock and latch may be on one side of the door. These doors may be forced
by prying upward at the bottom of the door with a prying tool, but time can be saved by
knocking out a panel and turning the latch from the inside.
(b) Slab doors. Pivoting or overhead slab doors are locked similarly
to sectional or folding doors. Sometimes it’s possible to pry outward with a bar on each side,
at the bottom of the door. This will tend to bend the bar enough to pass the keeper.
(c) Rolling steel doors. Rolling steel doors are the toughest doors to
force and usually can only be breached by cutting through the door using power tools. This
type of door is best opened using explosive breaching techniques.
b. Windows. Windows seem to present easy access in that the glass can usually be
easily broken out. However, soldiers are slowed by the size and height of windows and
windows can be easily booby trapped. Not all windows are made of glass. Lexan plastic
windows look like glass but are 250 times stronger than safety glass and 30 times stronger than
plexiglas. These types of windows can be found on storefronts and banking structures.
When presented with a Lexan window, discharge a carbon dioxide fire extinguisher directly on
it and then strike it with a pick or other sharp object to break it.
(1) Barred windows. Barred windows have bars permanently secured in
the masonry above and below the window. To free the bars, soldiers should strike the bars
with a sledgehammer approximately 10 inches above the windowsill. As the bar bends, the
end will sometimes pull free of the sill. Another method is to strike the sill with a sledgehammer
opposite the end of the bar. A blow at this point will sometimes release the end of the bar.
Still another method is to use a hammer headed pick on the masonry sill at the edge of the bar.
Strike the end of the pick with a sledgehammer to crack the masonry sufficiently to release the
end of the bar. The oxyacetylene cutting torch and power saws are recommended forcible
entry tools for steel construction; they work when all other tools fail. Explosives can be used
________________________________________________________________
I-177
071-SL1-XXX8
when all else fails.
(2) Heavy wire mesh. Heavy wire mesh guards are often used over windows
and doors. These mesh guards may be permanently installed, hinged at the top or side, fitted
into brackets, and locked securely. Regardless of how they are installed, forcing wire mesh
guards involves considerable time and should be avoided.
(3) When breaking glass windows the following steps should be followed:
•
Step one. Stand on the up wind side of the window so the small slivers are
not blown back, if the situation allows. Do not stand directly in front of the
window as this could expose the soldier to enemy fire from the opposite
side of the window and keeps the falling glass from falling on the soldier.
Use the wall for cover and do not get exposed to observation or fire.
•
Step two. Strike pane at the top breaking the window (Figure 3).
Figure 3. Break window at the top.
•
Step three. Rake the remaining glass from the windowsill with a side-toside sweeping motion along the rims of the windowsill, using the same tool
that you broke the window with (Figure 4).
________________________________________________________________
I-178
071-SL1-XXX8
Figure 4. Rake the remaining glass from the sill.
c. Floors. There are almost as many kinds of floors as there are buildings. The type
of floor construction is, however, limited to the basics: wood and concrete. Either of the two
may be finished with a variety of flooring materials. Large building such as commercial multi
story structures usually have concrete floors where multi story family dwellings usually will have
wooden floors.
(1) Wooden floors. The floor joists of wooden floor construction are usually
spaced 16 inches part. A subfloor, consisting of plywood or boards is laid over the joists.
The finish floor, which may be tile, linoleum, hardwood, or carpeting is laid last. The steps
for breaching wooden floors are as follows:
•
Step one. Determine the location to be breached and sound the floor (by
tapping on the floor while listening for a hollow or solid sound) for the floor
joist to decide the exact location.
•
Step two. Cut away the floor finishing and remove it from the breach site
to expose the subfloor.
•
Step three. Cut away the subfloor, effecting the breach.
(2) Concrete floors. The general construction of concrete floors makes them
extremely hard to breach. If a concrete floor must be breached it is best to use power
jackhammers or concrete cutting blades on power saws.
________________________________________________________________
I-179
071-SL1-XXX8
d. Walls. The method of breaching a wall will be highly dependent on the type
material the wall is constructed from.
(1) Masonry and veneered walls. Masonry walls are the toughest type to
breach. One appliance that may be used is the battering ram. The battering ram is made of iron
with handles hand guards. One end is jagged for breaking brick and stone, and the other end
is rounded and smooth for battering walls and doors. The ram requires a minimum of two
soldiers to operate. They work together to swing the ram back and forth into the wall. Each
time the ram strikes the wall, a little more of the masonry material falls away. This is continued
until the breach is the size needed.
(2) Wood frame walls. Wood frame walls are constructed with wood or
fiberboard sheathing over wooden studs. The exterior siding, which may be wood clap board,
or board and siding, asbestos shingles, stucco, or other exterior finish, is fastened over the
sheathing. The procedures for breaching wood framed walls is the same as for breaching floors
and roofs except that the breach is vertical instead of horizontal.
(3) Partition walls. The general types of partition construction such as hollow
clay tile covering wooden or metal studding, or solid concrete block. Solid concrete block
should be breached the same as exterior masonry walls. If the wall requires breaching, use
the following procedures:
•
Step one. Select the location of the breach. Before breaching, check the
area for electric outlets and switches.
•
Step two. Locate studs by sounding the wall.
•
Step three. Cut along the side of the stud to effect the breach.
e. Roofs and ceilings. Because roofs and ceilings are constructed basically the same
as floors, the procedures for breaching are the same.
3. After effecting the breach, signal that the breach (entry) point has been cleared.
4. Secure and maintain the breach (entry) point.
statement.
________________________________________________________________
I-180
071-SL1-XXX8
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must select the proper tools for breaching a door or a
window and that he will conduct the breach.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. The soldier performs a mechanical breach of a door.
P
F
P
F
a. Outward-opening door.
b. Inward-opening door.
c. Other types of door.
d. Pulls the door open or pries open with another tool when
the lock clears the keeper.
OR
2. The soldier performs a breach of a window.
OR
3. The soldier performs a breach of a wall, floor, or ceiling.
P
F
FEEDBACK
any task step. If the soldier scores a NO-GO, show what was done wrong and how to do it
correctly.
REFERENCES
Required
FM 7-7J
FM 7-8
Related
FM 90-10-1
________________________________________________________________
I-181
071-SL1-XXX9
REACT TO GRENADES IN AN URBAN ENVIRONMENT
071-SL1-XXX9
CONDITIONS
Operating as a member of a unit in an urban environment. Given tactical situations.
STANDARDS
React to a grenade by diverting the body away from the initial blast or taking cover.
NOTE: There are numerous known types of fragmentation and/or casualty producing
grenades. Though most of them are made differently, they have one commonality:
they are extremely effective at close range. Fragmentation grenades are designed to
have a 360-degree bursting radius that can kill, maim, or cripple personnel within
ranges to 100 meters. Most threat hand grenades have a fuze delay of 3.3 to 4.3
seconds before exploding. These delay times are not exact and should not be
considered when responding to a thrown grenade. The delay time can be shortened,
known as a “cook off”, by holding the grenade for a certain period of time after the
safety pin and spoon have been released.
CAUTION
________________________________________________________________
I-182
071-SL1-XXX9
and abrasions.
NOTE: To enhance individual survival, soldiers must be trained to take immediate actions
against grenades. The instinctive reaction to a thrown grenade is to run. This is the
situation in which the grenade takes the most casualties. Soldiers should be trained
to seek close cover or fall to the ground and crawl to the nearest cover, locate the
direction that the grenade came from, and return fire. The force from a grenade
exploding on the ground or floor travels up and outward, catching anyone trying to
run away. The survival rate will be much greater for those who fall away from the
grenade instead of wasting valuable time looking for cover. This type of training must
be continuous and unannounced until the action becomes second nature.
1. Respond to a grenade in an open area, a room, or a hallway.
•
The first person that sees a grenade yells “GRENADE” and LOCATION. Giving
the location or direction of the grenade ensures that unit members move away from
the grenade, not toward it.
•
DO NOT run or seek distant cover.
•
Fall or dive away from the grenade.
•
Ensure the upper torso is in the opposite direction of the blast.
•
Cover the head as much as possible with hands and arms.
•
Reorient yourself when possible and seek close cover in case of multiple grenades
or an attacking force.
•
Cover your weapon as much as possible to try and prevent damage to the weapon.
NOTE: Any attempt to pick up or kick a thrown grenade should be highly discouraged.
2. Respond to a grenade in a stairwell.
•
The first person that sees the grenade yells “GRENADE” and the location.
Giving the location or direction of the grenade ensures that unit members move
away from the grenade, not toward it.
NOTE: Personnel encountering a grenade while moving up stairs naturally react by moving
________________________________________________________________
I-183
071-SL1-XXX9
down the stairs. This is usually the worst possible reaction and soldiers have to be
trained to react otherwise. The reaction of soldiers in a stairwell to a grenade must
be instantaneous. Considerations are: 1) location of the grenade; 2) location of
soldiers in the stairwell; 3) whether the grenade is bouncing down the stairs or lands
and remains stationary; and, finally, 4) movement speed of the grenade and the
soldiers in the stairwell.
•
If higher on the stairs than the grenade do not attempt to move down the stairs past
the grenade.
•
Attempt to remain above or below its bursting arc if the grenade lands on the stairs
or landing and remains stationary (Figure 1).
BURSTING ARC
SAFE
ZONE
GRENADE
SAFE
ZONE
Figure 1. Grenade on a stairwell.
•
Attempt to move up past a grenade that is bouncing down the stairs. This action
may give some protection from the blast of the grenade and it may surprise the
individual who threw the grenade.
•
If at the bottom of the stairs (support team), dive away from the grenade or use the
closest cover to the stairwell, if available.
•
Reorient yourself when possible and seek cover in case of multiple grenades or an
attacking force.
________________________________________________________________
I-184
071-SL1-XXX9
NOTE: Any attempt to pick up or kick a thrown grenade should be highly discouraged.
statement. Evaluators should have M69 practice grenades and/or flash-bang grenades.
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that he or she is to react to grenades as they appear. After
grading the soldier on the actions for reacting to a grenade in a hallway or a street and a grenade
in a stairwell, tell him or her that the next grenades should be acted on “without warning”.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Responds to a grenade on the ground or floor.
P
F
P
F
a. Yells “grenade” and gives direction.
b. Falls or dives to the ground in the opposite direction
of the grenade.
c. Places upper torso away from the grenade.
d. Covers the head with hands and arms.
e. Reorients when possible and seek cover in case of
multiple grenades or an attacking force.
2. Responds to a grenade in a stairwell.
a. Yells “grenade” and gives direction.
b. Does not run down the stairs.
Results
c. Falls flat to the stairs or runs up the stairs away from
the grenade.
NOTE: If the soldier falls flat to the stairs, ensure orientation away from the grenade and
covering of head with hands and arms.
d. At the bottom of the stairs, dives away from the grenade
________________________________________________________________
I-185
071-SL1-XXX9
or uses the closest cover of the stairwell, if available.
e. Reorients when possible and seeks cover in case of multiple
grenades or an attacking force.
f. Continues the mission.
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
FM 23-30
FM 7-8
FM 7-7J
TM 9-1330-200-12
Related
FM 90-10-1
________________________________________________________________
I-186
071-SL1-XXX5
UTILIZE A RESPIRATOR
071-SL1-XXX5
CONDITIONS
uncertain, given an individual weapon with ammunition and load-bearing equipment. Given a
respirator.
STANDARDS
Properly don the respirator. Continue to perform the mission while wearing the respirator.
NOTE: The protective mask does not substitute for a respirator. The protective mask filters
chemicals out of the air. A respirator provides oxygen for use in an oxygen-deprived
atmosphere.
NOTE: The Army has not yet selected a respirator for use in MOUT.
1.
a.
(1)
2.
•
statement.
element in urban terrain.
EVALUATION GUIDE
________________________________________________________________
I-187
071-SL1-XXX5
Results
1.
P
F
2.
P
F
3.
P
F
4.
P
F
5.
P
F
a.
b.
c.
d.
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
FM 7-7J
FM 7-8
Related
FM 90-10-1
________________________________________________________________
I-188
071-SL1-XXX5
________________________________________________________________
I-189
SECTION II
SKILL LEVEL 2
II-1
II-2
071-SL2-XXX2
CONTROL MOVEMENT OF A FIRE TEAM IN A BUILDING
071-SL2-XXX2
CONDITIONS
Acting as a team leader in an urban environment. Given specific instructions by the squad
leader which require conducting movement in a building. The team is equipped with all TO&E
equipment authorized. The team is operating as part of a squad while moving in a building.
The size, location, and NBC capabilities of the enemy are unknown. Given specific rules of
engagement (ROE).
STANDARDS
React immediately to the squad leader’s orders or instructions. Plan, prepare, and conduct
movement of the team in an urban environment in a building. Select the appropriate movement
technique for hallways. Control the movement of the fire team with visual and verbal signals.
Communicate the ROE to all team members and enforce it. The team complies with the ROE.
NOTE: Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especially true
of an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. The
presence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat power
available to a team leader. His team may have to operate with "no fire" areas. ROE
can prohibit the use of certain weapons until a specific hostile action takes place. All
soldiers must be aware of the ROE. Leaders must include the precise use of
weapons in their planning for urban missions.
CAUTION____________________________________
soldiers.
________________________________________________________________
II-3
071-SL2-XXX2
terrain, all soldiers use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts and
abrasions.
inhabitants, consider the use of 5.56-mm and 7.62-mm Controlled Penetration Ammunition
(CPA) “Soft Round” which will penetrate human bodies/walls and then stop either in the
body or in the wall.
WARNING__________________________________________
__
NOTE: Use of frangible ammunition will prevent firing through objects (furniture,
walls, etc.). An enemy not equipped with frangible ammunition will not
be so limited. This could place the unit at a severe disadvantage.
1. Thoroughly understand the mission.
2. Inform the team members of the mission.
3. Organize the team for movement. Squads are normally organized into assault and support
elements when moving in restrictive terrain. Regardless of how the team is designated, team
leaders (in order to better command and control) may number their team members for
movement and, particularly, for entry into rooms and buildings.
NOTE: By numbering his team, the leader can command and control his element by
maintaining a standard order of movement. These standard orders of movement
must remain flexible. Each team member must know and understand the mission of
each position during all entries. By knowing this, it allows the leader to rotate
________________________________________________________________
II-4
071-SL2-XXX2
personnel. Rotation of personnel among the tasks of the fire team during clearing will
maintain combat effectiveness and facilitate easy transition from one situation to
another. Ideally, maintain the fire team as an organization for a mission such as
clearing a room. However, there might be times when the best organization might
be to have two two-man buddy teams, such as when clearing a stairwell.
considered as being monitored by enemy forces, news media, and any entity with a
minimum of technology. Transmissions must be characterized by the use of call signs,
authentication, and prowords to transmit data.
fragmentation grenade when clearing rooms, hallways, and stairwells..
4. Select the correct formation and movement technique for the fire team based on the mission
given.
a. Formations.
(1) Move through a hallway in a Serpentine formation, a Rolling-T formation,
or a Cross cover formation.
•
Use the serpentine formation in narrow hallways.
•
Use the rolling-T formation in wide hallways.
•
Use the Cross cover formation when rear security can be provided by
another element
(2) File Formation. The file formation might be used if the fire team is moving
quickly through the building such as through already cleared and secured portions to exploit
another teams’ gains.
________________________________________________________________
II-5
071-SL2-XXX2
NOTE: Team members must be aware of the actions to take if any member has a malfunction
and who covers that sector of fire. This should be practiced when rehearsals are
conducted.
b. Movement Techniques. The three basic movement techniques should be used if the
team is split into buddy teams:
(1) Traveling. Traveling is used when contact with the enemy is not likely and
speed is needed. Speed is more important than security, such as when a fire team might be
moving through a building that has already been cleared.
(2) Traveling Overwatch. Traveling Overwatch is used when contact with the
enemy is possible. An example might be when a fire team is moving while being overwatched
by another fire team such as clearing a hallway.
(3) Bounding Overwatch. Bounding Overwatch is used when contact is
imminent or ongoing. An example might be when a fire team is clearing with another team
down a hallway or a stairwell.
5. Brief team members on the ROE.
6. Conduct rehearsals if at all possible.
7. Control movement with verbal and non-verbal commands.
a. Verbal commands.
b. Non-verbal commands and signals (See task 071-SL1-XXX3, Use Nonverbal
Communication Techniques). These should be used when possible to maintain the element of
surprise and not alert the enemy to the presence of the team.
•
Hand and arm signals.
•
Aiming devices.
•
Pyrotechnic devices.
•
Leadership.
•
Audio devices such as whistles or any other noisemaking device.
8. Team leader changes organization, formations, and movement techniques as he sees
necessary to accomplish the mission.
________________________________________________________________
II-6
071-SL2-XXX2
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the team leader that he will conduct the movement of a team in a building.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Understands the mission.
P
F
3. Organizes the team.
P
F
4. Selects the correct formation and movement technique for buildings.
P
F
5. Briefs ROE.
P
F
6. Conducts rehearsals.
P
F
7. Controls the movement of the team with visual
and verbal signals.
P
F
2. Informs the team members of the mission.
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
Related
FM 7-7J
FM 90-10-1
FM 7-8
________________________________________________________________
II-7
071-SL2-XXX3
CONTROL MOVEMENT OF A FIRE TEAM IN A
SUBTERRANEAN PASSAGEWAY IN AN URBAN
ENVIRONMENT
071-SL2-XXX3
CONDITIONS
Acting as a team leader in an urban environment. Given a fire team with the mission of
conducting movement in a subterranean passageway. The team is equipped with all TO&E
equipment authorized in addition to ammunition, grenades, pyrotechnics, explosives,
construction and barrier equipment as well as improvised equipment such as mirrors, lights,
and other devices. Given specific Rules of Engagement (ROE).
STANDARDS
Plan, prepare, and execute a mission by moving through a subterranean passageway at the
time specified in the order. Communicate the ROE to all personnel.
available to a team leader. The team may have to operate with "no fire" areas.
ROE can prohibit the use of certain weapons until a specific hostile action takes
place. All soldiers must be aware of the ROE. Leaders must include the precise
use of weapons in their planning for urban missions.
CAUTION
________________________________________________________________
II-8
071-SL2-XXX3
abrasions.
1. Receive the mission and conduct Troop Leading Procedures. Considerations to
understand to perform the mission successfully are:
a. Tactical Value. Offensively, underground passages provide the team with covered
and concealed routes into and through built up areas. Defensively, subterranean passages are
useful to the defender only to the extent that the attacker can be denied their use. The defender
has an advantage in that, given the confining, dark environment of these passages, a small
group of determined soldiers in a prepared position can defeat a numerically superior force.
b. Characteristics. Tunnels afford the team little cover and concealment except for the
darkness and any man-made barriers. The passageways provide tight fields of fire and amplify
the effect of grenades. Obstacles at intersections in the tunnels set up excellent ambush sites
and turn the subterranean passages into a deadly maze. These obstacles can be quickly
created using chunks of rubble, furniture, and parts of abandoned vehicles interspersed with
command detonated M18A1 Claymore mines.
c. Use of Weapons. The confined space amplifies the sound of weapons firing to a
dangerous level. The overpressure from grenades, mines, and booby traps exploding in a
sewer or tunnel can have an adverse effect on troops. Also, gases found in sewers can be
flammable, making this a double-edged weapon for both attackers and defenders. For these
reasons, small-arms weapons should be employed as the main weapon system in tunnels and
sewers. Friendly personnel should be outside tunnels or out of range of the effects when mines
or demolitions are detonated.
________________________________________________________________
II-9
071-SL2-XXX3
inhabitants, consider the use of 5.56-mm and 7.62-mm Controlled Penetration Ammunition
(CPA) “Soft Round” which will penetrate human bodies/walls and then stop either in the
body or in the wall.
WARNING__________________________________________
__
d. Local Knowledge/Navigation. Prior to conducting an urban operation and
especially a tunnel patrol, it is imperative that up to date local town plans and sewer maps are
acquired. Any locals with knowledge of underground routes must be questioned in detail.
Once below ground, pacing must be used as a guide to location.
e. Threat. Consider the following threats for both offensive and defensive operations
in subterranean passageways:
(1) Enemy Presence in Tunnels. It is likely that the enemy will want to use
tunnels and they may have the advantage of marked routes and detailed reconnaissance. They
may have the element of surprise, being able to select ambush positions and withdrawal routes.
A defended position in an underground facility could be very effective. It should be well
protected, channeling the enemy into a killing zone to inflict maximum casualties.
(2) Booby-traps. When moving through tunnels, great care must be taken to
avoid booby traps. These will often be deployed near junctions and will often be operated by
trip wires. Water-filled tunnels provide excellent camouflage for AP mines scattered on likely
routes. If moving without light, the lead man needs to feel for wires and should use a tripwire
feeler. He should also avoid walking in water if possible.
(3) Natural Problems. With the battle continuing above, and the possibilities
of an artillery barrage, there is a strong possibility of flooding and cave in. It is essential to
identify escape routes.
f. Problems Involved with Tunnel Fighting. There are several factors peculiar to tunnel
fighting:
________________________________________________________________
II-10
071-SL2-XXX3
(1) Darkness. In the close confines of a tunnel, passive equipment such as
NODs, which require ambient light, are of little use. Therefore IR and white light are
required. The following will be useful:
•
NVG with IR source.
•
IR filtered lights.
•
White light flashlights.
(2) Vision Aids. Aids to vision are:
•
Mirrors. Mirrors can be used to look around corners and monitor major
junctions for a defended position.
•
Bright Lamps. Lamps may be necessary when constructing a defended
position. Their use gives soldiers a sense of security.
(3) Use of Grenades. Concussion and fragmentation grenades will produce a
large shock wave and could, if used excessively, collapse the tunnel. The following
alternatives should be considered:
•
WP Grenades. Give careful consideration prior to the use of a white
phosphorus grenade inside an enclosed space as the contents spread,
ignite, and burn in the air and could cause extreme burns to the body.
These grenades should be used with extreme caution, as no immediate
follow up is possible.
•
Smoke Grenades. Smoke will linger in a tunnel for a long period of time.
It will certainly confuse the enemy and it is extremely toxic. This is a
double-edged weapon. Protective masks will be of little use against smoke
grenades because the smoke displaces oxygen.
(4) Inability to Maneuver. As cover is limited inside tunnels, it is advisable to
wear all combat body armors. Other considerations are:
•
Ropes. Ropes can be used not only ease of movement through tunnels,
but also to attach to each member of the operation. This enables team
members to be easily retrieved. This safety line should be tied to team
members leaving 5-meter intervals between them.
• Wire Mesh. Attaching wire mesh to the souls of combat boots can prevent
________________________________________________________________
II-11
071-SL2-XXX3
slipping and enhance traction in certain situations.
(5) Extreme Noise During Engagements. All personnel below ground must
wear at least one set of hearing protection to avoid being stunned by blast and noise.
(6) Degradation of Radio Communications. Radio communication inside the
tunnels will be severely degraded. Several methods to overcome this are:
•
Use of messengers.
•
Increase power setting on radio.
•
Land Line and Field Telephone.
(7) Limitation of Firepower. The limited use of available firepower will favor
the defender. Positions should be able to hold off a much larger force. Weapons best suited
to the defender are:
•
Flame-throwers (currently not in service in the US inventory but note that
the M202 Flash exists in war stocks).
•
Shotguns.
(8) Chemical Hazard. A constant concern for troops conducting underground
patrols is chemical defense. Enemy chemical warfare (CW) agents used in tunnels will be
encountered in dense concentrations, with little chance of it dispersing (no wind). A Chemical
Agent Alarm System, carried by the point man, will provide instantaneous warning of the
presence of CW agents. M8 and M9 Detection Papers should also be used to test for
presence of chemical agents. Noxious gases from decomposing sewage can also pose a threat.
________________________________________________________________
II-12
071-SL2-XXX3
These gases are not completely filtered by the soldier's protective mask. Unit leaders must be
constantly alert for the physical signs of their presence and the symptoms to their soldiers.
Regardless of whether or not a gas is lethal, if it displaces the oxygen, protective masks will not
protect soldiers from injury or death due to a lack of oxygen.
(9) Psychological Considerations. Combat operations in subterranean
passages are much like night combat operations. The psychological factors reduce confidence,
cause fear, and increase a feeling of isolation. This feeling of isolation is further magnified by
the tight confines of the tunnels. The layout of tunnels could require greater dispersion between
positions.
(a) Enforce Measures. Enforce measures to help dispel the feelings of
fear and isolation experienced when operating in tunnels. These measures include leadership
training, physical and mental fitness, sleep discipline, and stress management.
(b) Communications. Maintain communication with soldiers manning
positions in the tunnels either by personal visits or by field telephone. Communications inform
leaders of the tactical situation as well as the mental state of their soldiers. Training during
combat operations is limited; however, soldiers manning positions below ground should be
given as much information as possible on the organization of the tunnels and the importance of
the mission. Brief them on contingency plans and alternate positions should their primary
positions become untenable. All members both above and below ground must know
recognition signals.
(c) Stress. Maintain physical and mental fitness by periodically
rotating soldiers out of tunnels so they can stand and walk in fresh air and sunlight. Stress
management is also a factor of operations in tunnels. Historically, combat in built-up areas has
been one of the most stressful forms of combat. Continuous darkness and restricted maneuver
space cause even more stress to soldiers than street fighting.
2. Secure special equipment needed for tunnel clearing tasks. Consideration should be given
to the following equipment:
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before entering and clearing tunnels,
abrasions.
________________________________________________________________
II-13
•
071-SL2-XXX3
Tools needed for opening manhole covers.
R-30A, Breaching Devices: When explosives cannot be used or are not appropriate
or available for breaching, the assault team should consider the use of breaching devices
such as the Hooligan’s Tool, etc, to remove all glass from windows and to create
loopholes and mouseholes.
•
Mirror on a pole, to look around corners. This can be constructed with a light source
(IR, white light) for illumination.
•
Sketch of the tunnel system to include magnetic north, azimuths, distances and
locations of manhole covers.
•
Respirators, if available.
•
NVG with IR light, (thermal viewing devices are ideal as they do not need ambient
light).
•
Flashlights, with filtered lens cover, IR if possible.
•
Chicken wire wrapped around boots to improve footing.
•
Safety rope.
•
Marking devices.
•
A chemical agent alarm system (METT-T dependant).
•
Tripwire feeler.
•
Field telephone.
•
Pace count beads.
3. Organize the team as required for subterranean operations. Reorganize the team based on
the size of the tunnel. For most tunnels, a two-man team is sufficient. Ideally, a four-man
team would give more security and flexibility. Additional teams can enter the tunnel as the
clearance progresses, although the extreme effects of blast makes it necessary to use the
minimum number of men below ground.
4. Move the team to the entrance to the tunnel and secure the area. Signal for the cover to be
removed. A grenade can be dropped in as the cover is removed. This could, however, alert
________________________________________________________________
II-14
071-SL2-XXX3
the enemy of the unit's intentions.
NOTE: No entry should be made for 15 minutes, when possible. This should allow gases
present to dissipate. However, removal of the cover and waiting 15 minutes does
not ensure the safety of the force from harmful gases or inadequate oxygen in the
tunnel. Prior to entry, fresh air should be forced into the tunnel if possible and
respirators should be used if available.
5. Move the pointman into the tunnel. The pointman checks to determine whether the air is
breathable and how much the size of the tunnel restricts movement.. The presence of
cockroaches and rats indicate that there is an adequate supply of oxygen. He should remain in
place ten minutes before the rest of the unit follows. If he becomes ill or gets into trouble,
pulling on the safety rope can retrieve him.
6. Once the pointman has identified that the area is clear, signal the team to enter. The team
may have to be reorganized based upon the size of the tunnel.
7. Control navigation in the tunnel.
•
Select the route to be cleared.
•
Navigate, includes checking the sewer map and pacing.
•
Record the location, azimuth, and pace count throughout the mission.
8. Maintain communications.
________________________________________________________________
II-15
071-SL2-XXX3
9. Clear the tunnel. If the tunnel is large enough, it should be cleared the same as a hallway,
using the same formations, organizations, and movement techniques. Ensure that the pointman
moves 10 meters in front. Ensure that other team members maintain 5 meter intervals
(depending on factors such as water flow speed, if present). If water is present, and the flow
is greater than 2.5 meters per second, or if the footing is slippery, the interval could be
increased.
10. Ensure that the team clears blind corners and intersections. Junctions can prove to be a
complex problem and due to the nature and variety of junctions no hard and fast drill can be
adopted. Generally only one tunnel should be cleared at a time and once cleared, each new
tunnel should have a sentry posted to secure it.
11. Maintain three-dimensional 360-degree security.
12. Exit the tunnel.
Setup: Provide a test site with all the materials and equipment listed in the task conditions
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that as the team leader he will plan, prepare, and execute the
assigned mission.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Receives mission and begin planning.
2. Secures special equipment needed to conduct clearing of tunnel.
3. Task organizes team.
P
P
F
P
F
P
F
F
a. Assigns responsibilities.
b. Briefs each soldier on specific duties.
4. Conducts initial entry into tunnel.
a. Removes cover and waits 15 minutes
________________________________________________________________
II-16
071-SL2-XXX3
b. Sends pointman into tunnel to determine if the air is
breathable (waits ten minutes) and the size of the tunnel.
5. Moves into tunnel after ten minutes and reorganizes team
based on the size of the tunnel.
P
F
6. Controls navigation in the tunnel.
P
F
9. Maintains three dimensional and 360-degree security.
P
F
10. Exits team from tunnel.
P
F
7. Maintains communications.
P
F
8. Clears tunnel and junctions.
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
FM 7-7J
FM 7-8
Related
FM 90-10-1
________________________________________________________________
II-17
071-SL2-XXX4
CONDUCT A BREACH
071-SL2-XXX4
CONDITIONS
Acting as a team leader in an urban environment. Given a fire team with a mission of
conducting a breach for the purpose of creating a foothold in a building or to clear the room.
Both enemy forces and noncombatants could be present in the objective. The team is
equipped with all TO&E equipment authorized. Given necessary additional equipment to
conduct a breach. Given specific Rules of Engagement (ROE).
STANDARDS
React immediately to the squad leader’s orders and instructions. Plan, prepare, and conduct
the breach using a technique acceptable under the ROE, allowing the assault element to enter.
Communicate the ROE to the team members.
available to a team leader. ROE can prohibit the use of certain weapons until a
specific hostile action takes place. All soldiers must be aware of the ROE. Leaders
must include the precise use of weapons in their planning for missions in urban terrain.
CAUTION
________________________________________________________________
abrasions.
II-18
071-SL2-XXX4
1. Thoroughly understand the mission. Know –
a. The route the team will use.
b. The breach location.
c. Follow-on actions.
2. Inform the team members of the mission.
3. Determine the breaching technique that will be used. Secure special equipment needed for
breaching task.
as the Hooligan’s Tool, etc, to force open doors, windows, and to create mouseholes.
R-30B, Rifle Launched Entry Munition: The assault team should consider the use of
breaching devices such as the rifle launched entry munition to force open doors, windows,
and to create mouseholes.
R-27, Man Size Hole: Leaders should consider the use of the Beast or Explosive
Cutting Tape (ECT) for creating man sized breaches both on the exterior and interior of
buildings, allowing soldiers access for assaulting and movement in and through buildings.
4. Organize the team for breaching based upon the breaching technique. Designate personnel
by positions and actions to conduct the breach and conduct necessary training on essential
tasks. Conduct rehearsals if possible.
5. Move the breaching team along covered and concealed avenues of approach to the
designated breach (entry) point. Arrive at the breach (entry) point undetected if a stealthy
breach is required. Arrive at the breach (entry) point in the correct order for the breaching
________________________________________________________________
II-19
071-SL2-XXX4
technique selected. Maintain security in 360 degrees and in three dimensions.
6. Ensure that all team members are prepared for follow-on actions before beginning the
breach. Team members avoid the use of verbal signals during a stealthy breach, which may
alert the enemy and destroy the element of surprise.
7. Receive the signal from the squad leader to execute the breach.
8. Execute the breach. Secure and maintain the breach (entry) point.
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he will conduct a breach at a specific location.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Understands the mission.
P
F
P
F
5. Conducts rehearsals if possible.
P
F
6. Moves the team along covered and concealed routes using appropriate
movement techniques.
P
F
Results
7. Conducts the breach upon the squad leader’s signal.
P
F
8. Secures and maintains the breach (entry) point.
P
F
2. Informs the team members of the mission.
P
F
3. Selects breaching technique to be used.
4. Designates team member positions for the appropriate breaching technique P
F
FEEDBACK
________________________________________________________________
II-20
071-SL2-XXX4
REFERENCES
Required
FM 5-250
FM 7-7J
FM 7-8
Related
FM 90-10-1
________________________________________________________________
II-21
071-SL2-XXX5
CONSTRUCT, EMPLACE, AND DETONATE
A FLEXIBLE LINEAR CHARGE
071-SL2-XXX5
CONDITIONS
As a team leader of an assault element in urban terrain with the enemy location and strength
uncertain, given a target, an individual weapon with ammunition, LCE, and materials to
construct, emplace, and detonate a flexible linear charge.
STANDARDS
Properly construct, emplace, and detonate the flexible linear charge to breach a wooden door.
available. Units may have to operate with "no fire" areas. ROE can prohibit the use
of certain weapons until a specific hostile action takes place. All soldiers must be
aware of the ROE. Leaders must include the precise use of weapons in their
planning for missions on urban terrain.
NOTE: The flexible linear charge is the charge of choice for almost any type door. It may be
used on light metal doors. The metal may not be cut like a wooden door but the
metal may be pushed or caved in, separating the door from the doorframe. The
charge may also be placed on windows. After detonating, the door may still be
standing in the frame, with only a push or shove mechanically to completely separate
it.
1. Assemble the following materials:
•
Common firing system. Construct a common initiating system IAW Individual
Tasks: Construct a Nonelectric Initiating Assembly with MDI, Task 051-1931055 and/or Construct a Dual Firing System with MDI, Task 051-193-1202.
•
Prop stick, if required.
________________________________________________________________
II-22
071-SL2-XXX5
•
100 mph tape.
•
Double-contact tape.
•
Detonation cord, as required.
•
Demolition kit.
2. Construct the flexible linear charge.
a. Lay out and cut double contact tape to required length. Exposed side should be
facing up (Figure 1).
END VIEW
100 MPH TAPE
DOUBLE CONTACT TAPE
SUFFICIENT WRAPS OF
DET CORD
TOP VIEW
SUFFICIENT WRAPS
OF DET CORD
COVERED BY TAPE.
EACH CORD MUST
TOUCH THE OTHER.
________________________________________________________________
II-23
VERSION
7, 1 APRIL 1999
PIG TAIL”
FOR PRIMING (AT
LEAST 6 INCHES)
071-SL2-XXX5
Figure 1. Flexible linear charge.
b Place the strands of detonation cord down the center of the double-contact tape and
press firmly in place with the long strand in the center of the tape.
c. Cover strands of detonation cord and exposed double-edged contact tape with
100-mph tape.
d. Tie an overhand knot in the end of the long strand of detonation cord, making a 6inch detonation cord pigtail (Figure 2).
FLEXIBLE
LINEAR
CHARGE
HINGE
LOCATIONS
“PIG TAIL”
FOR PRIMING
(AT LEAST 6
INCHES)
Figure 2. Placement of flexible linear charge hinge side.
e. Roll the charge starting at the pigtail end. This will allow easy placement of the
charge and protection of the pigtail while in storage.
NOTE: When rolling for storage or transportation, the double-sided contact tape should be
rolled on the inside to prevent cracking and separation from the wax paper covering.
Use rubber bands to keep the rolled charge together.
3. Size the target up. In the case of the flexible linear charge, any type wooden door
(hollow-core, particle filled, and solid wood) can be defeated.
4. Emplace the charge.
________________________________________________________________
II-24
071-SL2-XXX5
a. When placing on the target, peel off the double contact tape backing and attach to
the target from the top to the bottom.
NOTE: Placing the charge under wet conditions may cause the adhesive tape to be
ineffective. A secondary mounting method must be ready to be conducted if the tape
backing does not stick. Thumbtacks may be used for wooden doors.
b. Place the charge straight up and down on the door (Figure 2). When placing on the
door locking mechanism side, not enough space may be available to place directly over the
locking mechanism running parallel to the doorframe. Placing the charge as close to the
mechanism will cut the door and allow entry.
NOTE: If the charge is too long, or an angled cut of the door is desired, align the charge to
fit the required cut of the door. If the charge is too short, ensure that the charge
covers at least half the area of the desired cut.
c. If time is available and the situation allows, cut any additional length of the charge to
fit the desired cut.
5. Detonate the charge, effecting the breach of the door.
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a flexible linear charge to breach a
wooden door.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Assemble the materials.
P
F
3. Size the target up.
P
F
P
F
2. Construct the flexible linear charge.
P
F
________________________________________________________________
II-25
071-SL2-XXX5
5. Detonate the charge.
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
FM 5-250
Related
Ranger TC 350-1-2
________________________________________________________________
II-26
071-SL2-XXX6
A GENERAL PURPOSE CHARGE
071-SL2-XXX6
CONDITIONS
uncertain, given a target, an individual weapon with ammunition, load bearing equipment, and
materials to construct, emplace, and detonate a general purpose charge.
STANDARDS
Properly construct, emplace, and detonate the flexible linear charge to destroy doorknobs,
mild steel chains, locks, or equipment.
NOTES:
1. This charge is not a primary door breach charge due to overpressure and
fragmentation.
2. Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especially
true of an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. The
•
•
One block of C-4 (M112).
________________________________________________________________
II-27
•
6 feet of detonation cord.
•
1 Detaprime Booster if Uli knots are not used.
•
Demolition kit.
071-SL2-XXX6
2. Construct the general purpose charge.
a. Cut a length of detonation cord 24 inches long.
b. Using leftover detonation cord, tie two Uli knots around the 24-inch length of
detonation cord. Detaprime Booster may be used in place of the Uli knot.
NOTE: Uli knots should be a minimum of 6 wraps and be loose enough to slide on the main
line (Figure 1).
c. Cut off excess detonation cord from Uli knots. Tape may be used to ensure the
detonation cord does not loosen.
d. Cut a block of C-4 to a 2" X 2" square.
e. Secure the detonation cord to the C-4 by taping one Uli knot to either side of the
C-4 block (Figure 2).
________________________________________________________________
II-28
071-SL2-XXX6
SLIDING ULI
KNOT
TAPE
SLIDING ULI KNOT
TAPE KNOTS TO SIDES
OF EXPLOSIVES
Figure 1. Uli knot.
Figure 2. General purpose charge.
3. Charge placement.
a. Place the top loop over the doorknob.
b. Slide the charge and Uli knot upward to secure them to the doorknob (Figure 3).
c. For other types of targets such as chain, place the loop completely around the
target to form a girth hitch. Tighten the charge and Uli knots to secure (Figure 4). Loops may
be enlarged to accommodate target size.
d. For targets too large to form a girth hitch around, tape the charge to the target or
lay the charge on top of the target.
CHARGE
SQUARE
KNOT
NON-ELECTRICAL
DUAL DETONATING
ASSEMBLY
Figure 3. Charge on doorknob.
CHARGE SHOULD COVER 2-3
LINKS OF CHAIN
Figure 4. Charge on chain.
________________________________________________________________
II-29
071-SL2-XXX6
WARNING
Protection from blast and fragmentation on both sides of the target is
required. Consideration must be given to over-pressure when using a
charge in enclosed area.
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a general purpose charge to defeat the
target.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
P
Results
2. Construct the general purpose charge.
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
FM 5-250
Related
Ranger TC 350-1-2
________________________________________________________________
II-30
071-SL2-XXX7
A SILHOUETTE CHARGE
071-SL2-XXX7
CONDITIONS
materials to construct, emplace, and detonate a silhouette charge.
STANDARDS
Properly construct, emplace, and detonate the flexible linear charge to effect a breach of the
desired target.
NOTE: The silhouette charge is designed to be used against all wooden doors and selected
walls such as those constructed of plywood, sheetrock, and other lightly constructed
materials.
•
•
Two E-type silhouettes.
•
84 feet of detonation cord or flexible linear shaped charge (FLSC), as required.
•
1 each prop stick, if required.
•
100-mph tape.
•
•
One Demolition Kit
________________________________________________________________
II-31
071-SL2-XXX7
2. Construct the silhouette charge.
a. Tape 2 E-type silhouettes together (Figures 1 and 2).
b. Cut off or round the four corners of the silhouettes.
c. Place detonation cord or flexible linear shaped charge (FLSC) around edges of the
silhouettes leaving a 6 inch tail for priming. Secure detonation cord with 100mph tape so it
does not come loose. Use Table 1 to determine amount of explosives to use for specific
targets.
NOTE: Walls require 8 wraps of detonation cord.
d. Place 3 or 4 strips of double-contact tape running parallel to the long axis of the
charge for most of its length.
DET CORD WRAPS
PLACED ON
TARGET SIDE
TAPED TOGETHER TO
FORM HINGE
BRACE
STICK
POCKET
LEAVE
BOTTOM
HEAD ON
FOR
SUPPORT
CUT OFF
CORNERS
BRACE
STICK
POCKET
TAPED
TOGETHER
SOLID CHARGE
Figure 1. Solid silhouette charge
(creates a small hole).
PIG TAIL FOR
PRIMING
Figure 2. Folding silhouette charge.
(creates a larger hole).
e. Construct a sturdy pocket for a brace stick in the appropriate position on the back
of the silhouette.
3. Emplace the charge. Place the charge on the target approximately 6 inches off of the
________________________________________________________________
II-32
071-SL2-XXX7
ground.
DET CORD CHARGE CHART
Hollow-core door
1 wrap
Particle filled door (1")
2 wraps
Solid wood door (2")
3 wraps
High-quality solid door
4 wraps
1/4" plywood door
1 wrap
1/2" plywood door
2 wraps
3/4" plywood door
3 wraps
NOTE: Use four wraps for an unknown type/quality wood door.
Table 1. Silhouette charge explosive loads.
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a silhouette charge to breach a target.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
P
F
2. Construct the silhouette charge.
P F
________________________________________________________________
II-33
071-SL2-XXX7
P
F
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
FM 5-250
Related
Ranger TC 350-1-2
________________________________________________________________
II-34
071-SL2-XXX8
A RUBBER STRIP CHARGE
071-SL2-XXX8
CONDITIONS
materials to construct, emplace, and detonate a rubber strip charge.
STANDARDS
Properly construct, emplace, and detonate the rubber strip charge to defeat the specified
target.
NOTE: The Rubber Strip charge can open a solid wood door with multiple locking devices or
a metal door.
•
•
One 4" X 12" piece of rubber.
•
One 1" X 10" piece of sheet explosive or C-4.
________________________________________________________________
II-35
071-SL2-XXX8
WARNING
Net explosive weight should not exceed 8 ounces for a complete
charge.
•
36" of detonation cord or 20-gram Detaprime Booster.
•
100-mph tape.
•
•
One Demolition Kit.
2. Construct the rubber strip charge.
a. Cut 1 piece of rubber 2" x 12".
b. Cut 1 piece of sheet explosive or C-4, 1" x 10", not to exceed 6 ounces.
c. Place the explosive strip on top of the 2" x 12" piece of rubber so that there is 1" of
rubber at each end and 1/2" of rubber at each side of the explosive (Figure 1).
Rubber
1”
1/2”
Sheet
Explosive
1/2”
1”
Rubber
Figure 1. Rubber strip charge (top view).
d. Tape the rubber strips to the explosives.
e. Tie a Uli knot around a 12" piece of detonation cord or place a Detaprime booster
on the detonation cord.
f. Place a Uli knot or booster on the exposed explosive at the end of the charge and
securely tape in place (Figure 2).
g. Turn the charge so that the 2" x 12" rubber is on top and attach double-contact tape
________________________________________________________________
II-36
071-SL2-XXX8
to the rubber strip.
3. Size the target up. In the case of the rubber strip charge, it defeats the locking mechanism
of wooden or metal doors. The charge dislodges the door from the frame. It can also be used
to defeat windows with a physical security system.
ULI KNOT
Sheet Explosives
Rubber
DET CORD
Figure 2. Rubber strip charge (side view).
4. Emplace the charge. Place the charge on the target between locking devices and
doorjamb. Ensure that the rubber strip covers the area where the locking bolts are located.
WARNING
Friendly troops must be clear of the area 90 degrees from the target.
The doorknob will be blown away from the door with considerable force.
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a rubber strip charge to breach a wooden
door.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
P
F
________________________________________________________________
II-37
071-SL2-XXX8
2. Construct the rubber strip charge.
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
FM 5-250
Related
Ranger TC 350-1-2
________________________________________________________________
II-38
071-SL2-XXX9
A CHAIN LINK LADDER CHARGE
071-SL2-XXX9
CONDITIONS
materials to construct, emplace, and detonate a chain link ladder charge.
STANDARDS
Properly construct, emplace, and detonate the chain link ladder charge to create a man-sized
hole in a chain link fence.
•
•
1 large and one small treble hook. A hook can be manufactured from many items.
•
8 1/2' of detonation cord.
•
3 blocks of C-4 (M112).
•
3 Detaprime (20-gram) boosters.
________________________________________________________________
II-39
•
Electrical tape.
•
6" of surgical tubing.
•
1 demolition kit.
071-SL2-XXX9
2. Construct the chain link ladder charge.
a. Cut M112 blocks in half lengthwise making 6 charges 1" x 1" x 10".
b. Cut the 20-gram boosters in half crossways.
c. Tape the hook on one end of the detonation cord to allow hanging the charge from
the fence.
d. Place half of the 20-gram booster on the detonation cord.
NOTE: 6-wrap Uli knots constructed of detonation cord can replace the 20-gram booster.
e. Place half of an M112 block on the detonation cord and tape it in position with the
end 6" from the hook on the detonation cord. The booster should be taped to the M112 at the
end from which the charge is primed.
f. Leave 4" spacing between the M112 charges.
g. Follow steps 4, 5, and 6 until all M112 and boosters are secured to the detonation
cord (Figure 1).
________________________________________________________________
II-40
071-SL2-XXX9
Hook
½ M112
Block
Detonation
Cord
Space = 4
inches
½ 20 gram
Booster
Surgical
Tubing
Hook
Figure 1. Chain link ladder charge.
h. Tape the surgical tubing to the second hook and tape the other end to the base of
the detonation cord.
i. Tie an overhand knot in the end of the detonation cord to form a pigtail for priming.
3. Size the target up. Determine where charge is to be emplaced on the fence.
a. Secure the top of the charge to the breach location on the fence. Simply hang the
large hook into a link of the fence.
b. Secure the charge at the bottom of the fence using the surgical tubing and the small
hook.
NOTE: Only slight pressure is required to secure the charge; too much tension may cause the
fence to buckle and result in poor cutting of the fence.
________________________________________________________________
II-41
071-SL2-XXX9
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a chain link ladder charge to breach fence.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
P
F
2. Construct the chain link ladder charge.
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
FM 5-250
Related
Ranger TC 350-1-2
________________________________________________________________
II-42
071-SL2-XX10
A DOUGHNUT CHARGE
071-SL2-XX10
CONDITIONS
materials to construct, emplace, and detonate a doughnut charge.
STANDARDS
Properly construct, emplace, and detonate the doughnut charge to defeat the locking
mechanisms on wood or light metal doors.
NOTE: This charge, when detonated, removes the doorknob and locking mechanism from
wood doors.
•
•
•
1 roll of 100 mph tape.
________________________________________________________________
II-43
071-SL2-XX10
2. Construct the doughnut charge.
a. Cut the detonation cord to the following lengths:
•
1 each 2-foot length.
•
•
b. Using the 5-foot length of detonation cord, tie a sliding Uli knot around the 3-foot
length. The Uli knot should be a minimum of 16 wraps (Figure 1).
Figure 1. Uli knot.
c. Cut off excess detonation cord from both ends of the Uli knot (Figure 2).
Figure 2. Completed Uli knot.
d. 100 mph tape may be used to secure the ends of the Uli knot. After taping,
ensure that the knot can still slide along the main line.
e. Position the Uli knot at the center of the main line.
f. Fold the main line so that leads are running parallel and ends are even.
g. Using the 2-foot length of detonation cord, tie a sliding Uli knot around the leads of
the main line. The Uli knot should be a minimum of 4 wraps and loose enough to slide on the
main line (Figure 3).
________________________________________________________________
II-44
071-SL2-XX10
5 FT LENGTH
3 FT LENGTH
Figure 3. Doughnut charge.
h. Affix the firing system.
3. Size the target up. Determine where to emplace the doughnut charge to best defeat the
door locking mechanism and allow entry.
4. Emplace the charge on a doorknob.
a. Place the loop of detonation cord with the 16-wrap Uli knot on top of the
doorknob.
b. Slide the 4-wrap Uli knot upward toward the doorknob to tighten the loop around
the doorknob.
________________________________________________________________
II-45
071-SL2-XX10
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a doughnut charge to breach a wooden
door.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
P
F
2. Construct the doughnut charge.
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
FM 5-250
Related
Ranger TC 350-1-2
________________________________________________________________
II-46
071-SL2-XX11
A WALL BREACH CHARGE
071-SL2-XX11
CONDITIONS
materials to construct, emplace, and detonate a wall breach charge.
STANDARDS
Properly construct, emplace, and detonate the wall breach charge to breach a man-sized hole
in wood, masonry, or brick.
NOTE: The amount of explosives needed must be adjusted based on factors such as material
factor of the target and the breaching radius.
•
•
•
8 blocks of C-4 (M112).
________________________________________________________________
II-47
•
8 20-gram Detaprime boosters.
•
071-SL2-XX11
NOTE: If Detaprime boosters are not available, substitute with Uli knots, double overhand
knots, or a triple roll knots. Prime the explosives with any of these knots IAW
Individual Task 051-193-1007, Prime Explosives with Detonating Cord.
NOTE: A pre-made frame should be considered as a fixed mounting for the assembled
explosives and detonating system. This would allow soldiers to manufacture the
charge prior to the start of a mission and preventing soldiers from placing individual
blocks of explosives onto the target. This limits exposure to enemy fire and/or
observation. Several examples of this mount are:
•
A large enough piece of cardboard, plywood, or any like material.
•
A wooden frame such as a child's safety gate. This could be folded down to a
much smaller size than a fixed piece of mounting material.
•
A self manufactured frame with the intent of mounting the explosives and priming
material ahead of time.
2. Determine the type of wall to be breached.
3. Place eight 20-gram Detaprime boosters on the 20-foot section of detonation cord.
4. Place one 20-gram Detaprime booster on the end of each M112 block. Detaprime
boosters must be placed to the outside end of each M112 block. Secure with tape, making
sure the boosters slide freely on the detonation cord (Figure 1).
NOTE: If a mount is used for the explosives, ensure that proper distance is maintained while
placing the individual charges on the device.
5. Peel the self adhesive tape off the back of the M112 block. Place the charge onto the
mount surface at the proper distance.
NOTE: The adhesive tape will not adhere to wet, dirty, rusty, or frozen surfaces.
6. Place the charge onto the target surface (Figure 2). When the charge is placed against the
target, the explosive side must be in contact with the target, not the manufactured frame.
________________________________________________________________
II-48
071-SL2-XX11
DETAPRIME
BOOSTER
M112
DET CORD
Figure 1. Individual wall breach charge.
NOTE: ALL DISTANCES BETWEEN M112 BLOCKS ARE
APPROXIMATELY 10” (OR ONE M112 BLOCK LENGTH).
SAFE AREA
BEHIND WALL
10”
10”
10” NOTE DISTANCE FROM
GROUND
12”
Figure 2. Wall breach charge placement.
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a wall breaching charge to breach a mansized hole in a wall.
________________________________________________________________
II-49
071-SL2-XX11
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
P
F
P
F
3. Construct the wall breaching charge.
P
F
P
F
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
FM 5-250
Related
Ranger TC 350-1-2
________________________________________________________________
II-50
071-SL2-XX12
A REBAR CHARGE
071-SL2-XX12
CONDITIONS
materials to construct, emplace, and detonate a rebar charge.
STANDARDS
Properly construct, emplace, and detonate the rebar charge to remove a section of rebar large
enough to create a man-sized hole.
•
•
•
30 x 1/6 portions of M112 blocks (C-4).
•
30 x Detaprime boosters.
•
30 x 6" pieces of wire or banding material.
________________________________________________________________
II-51
•
071-SL2-XX12
2. Construct the rebar charge.
a. Place the 30 Detaprime boosters onto the 15-foot piece of detonation cord.
Secure the Detaprime boosters to the 1/6 blocks of M112 (C4) with tape, leaving them loose
enough to slide on the detonation cord (Figure 1).
b. On the opposite side of the booster, secure a piece of wire or banding material to
each 1/6 block of M112, for charge attachment, with tape.
4. Emplace the charge. Attach one 1/6 block of M112 to each piece of rebar to be cut by
the charge, using the wire for attachment, making sure that there is eminent contact, so not to
have a low order fire (Figure 2).
5. Detonate the charge, effecting the cutting of the rebar.
REBAR
BANDING
MATERIAL
TAPE
DETAPRIME BOOSTER
C-4
DET CORD
Figure 1. Rebar charge.
________________________________________________________________
II-52
071-SL2-XX12
REBAR CHARGE EMPLACEMENT
SAFE AREA
BEHIND WALL
Figure 2. Rebar charge placement.
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a rebar charge to make a man-size hole.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
P
F
3. Size the target up
P
F
P
F
P
F
2. Construct the rebar charge.
P
F
FEEDBACK
________________________________________________________________
II-53
071-SL2-XX12
REFERENCES
Required
FM 5-250
Related
Ranger TC 350-1-2
________________________________________________________________
II-54
071-SL2-XX13
A SHOOTING HOLE CHARGE
071-SL2-XX13
CONDITIONS
materials to construct, emplace, and detonate a shooting hole charge.
STANDARDS
Properly construct, emplace, and detonate a shooting hole charge to breach a hole large
enough to observe or to engage targets.
planning for precision missions on urban terrain.
NOTE: The amount of explosives needed must be adjusted based on factors such as material
factor of the target and the breaching radius.
•
•
Detonation cord, length METT-T dependent.
•
1 x M112 block (C-4).
________________________________________________________________
II-55
•
Optional: 1 x 10 gram Detaprime Booster.
•
1 x roll 100 mph tape.
071-SL2-XX13
2. Construct the shooting hole charge.
a. There are two methods of making the charge. The first method is:
(1) Cut detonation cord (length METT-T dependent).
(2) Make a 4 wrap quad knot on one end of the detonation cord.
(3) Place the quad knot into the middle of the M112 block and secure with
tape.
(4) Peel the self-adhesive tape from the M112 block.
(5) Place the charge on the surface approximately 12 inches up from ground
level (Figure 1).
Figure 1. Shooting hole charge placement.
NOTE: This charge may be detonated by tying into the ring main of the actual wall breach or
detonated as a separate charge by itself.
b. The second method is:
(1) Cut detonation cord (length METT-T dependent).
(2) Cut an M112 block in half.
________________________________________________________________
II-56
071-SL2-XX13
(3) Stack the M112 blocks on top of each other to form a square and tape.
(4) Attach 10-gram Detaprime booster to each side and tape ensuring the
booster is touching the C-4.
(5) Slide detonating cord through the Detaprime boosters forming a loop
around the C-4 and tape the ends together (Figure 2).
Detaprime Booster
M112 Block cut in
half
Detonating Cord
Tape
Attach to firing system
Figure 2. Shooting hole charge.
3. Size the target up. Ensure there is the proper net explosive weight (NEW) to accomplish
the mission. Specific breaching charges can be determined IAW Task 051-193-3024,
Calculate Breaching Charges.
4. Emplace the charge. Place charge to effect the desired shooting hole. Specific placement
instructions of breaching charges can be determined IAW Task 051-195-4051, Place
Breaching Charges.
statement.
________________________________________________________________
II-57
071-SL2-XX13
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a shooting hole charge to cut a breach in a
target to allow a soldier to fire his weapon through the hole.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
P
F
2. Construct the Shooting Hole charge.
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
FM 5-250
Related
Ranger TC 350-1-2
________________________________________________________________
II-58
071-SL2-XX14
CONSTRUCT, EMPLACE, AND DETONATE A BRASHIER
BREACH CHARGE
071-SL2-XX14
CONDITIONS
materials to construct, emplace, and detonate a Brashier breach charge.
STANDARDS
Properly construct, emplace, and detonate the Brashier breach charge to a clear a path
through a wire obstacle.
NOTE: The Brashier breach charge may also be used on chain link fences.
WARNING
Minimum safe distance must be increased to 100 feet in defilade due to
increased fragmentation.
•
________________________________________________________________
II-59
071-SL2-XX14
•
U-shaped picket stake.
•
12" stick or wire hooks.
•
Detonation cord, length METT-T dependent.
•
4 x M112 block (C-4).
•
1 x 20 gram Detaprime Booster.
•
1 x roll 100 mph tape.
2. Construct the Brashier breach charge.
a. Cut 4 blocks in half length wise on it's side. The result should be 8 strips of C4
(M112), each strip should measure 1/2" x 1 1/2" x 11" (Figure 1).
11”
.5”
1.5”
Figure 1. Cutting an M112 block.
b. Remove all wrapping material from the explosive. Place 8 strips of C4 on the
convex side of the picket (save 4" of C4 to cover the Uli knot or Detaprime booster at the
bottom).
c. Press C4 around the curves of the picket ensuring not to crack the center of the
explosive when forming the charge.
d. Securely tape explosive, detonation cord, and Detaprime booster in place. Tape
the 12" stick perpendicular to the picket, on the concave side and 18" from the top of the
Brashier Breach. Wire can be used as a method of attachment to the obstacle (Figure 2).
DETAPRIME
BOOSTER
________________________________________________________________
C-4
M112
II-60
DET
CORD
PICKET STAKE
COMMON
071-SL2-XX14
(PRIMING END VIEW)
Figure 2. Brashier Breach charge.
NOTE: The stick is placed in the wire to keep the charge from rocking left or right once
emplaced on the wire obstacle.
3. Size the target up. Determine the location of the proposed.
a. The charge is placed vertically on the friendly side of the wire with the top of the
charge extending past the highest wire strand. Ensure the stick is placed inside the wire to
prevent rocking (Figures 3 and 4).
b. Concave side of charge is toward wire/enemy. C4 is on the friendly side.
PICKET
________________________________________________________________
II-61
071-SL2-XX14
TAPE
STICK (NOTE: STICK
IS ON CONCAVE SIDE)
C-4 (M112)
DETAPRIME BOOSTED
DET CORD
Figure 3. Brashier Breach charge.
TOP VIEW
________________________________________________________________
II-62
071-SL2-XX14
MISSILE
HAZARD
TRIPLE STRAND
CONCERTINA
50 FT MSD
MISSLE
HAZARD
TRIPLE STRAND
CONCERTINA
FRIENDLY SIDE
ENEMY SIDE
SIDE VIEW
Figure 4. Brashier Breach charge emplacement.
NOTE: If concave side of picket faces friendlies, casualties could result with fragments and
molten metal landing as far as 150 meters away from the point of detonation. The
recommended minimum safe distance (MSD) is 50 feet directly to the rear of the
charge. Missile hazard increases along the flanks of the wire at distances less than
50 feet. The overpressure, directly to the rear, at 50 feet is less than 2 PSI.
________________________________________________________________
II-63
071-SL2-XX14
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a Brashier breach charge to breach an
obstacle.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
P
F
2. Construct the Brashier breach charge.
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
FM 5-250
Related
Ranger TC 350-1-2
________________________________________________________________
II-64
071-SL2-XX15
A WATER IMPULSE CHARGE
071-SL2-XX15
CONDITIONS
materials to construct, emplace, and detonate a water impulse charge.
STANDARDS
Properly construct, emplace, and detonate the water impulse charge to breach a wooden
door.
NOTE: In addition to all wooden doors, the water impulse charge can also breach light metal
doors.
•
•
Water bottle or intravenous bag.
•
Two foot of detonating cord.
________________________________________________________________
II-65
071-SL2-XX15
NOTE: Detonating cord can be longer or shorter to accommodate size of bottle and facilitate
tying into multiple door charges.
•
20-gram Detaprime booster or equivalent net explosive weight (NEW) using either
C-4 or Flex-X.
•
•
1 attachment method.
•
1 demolition kit.
2. Construct the water impulse charge.
a. Cut a piece of detonating cord 2 foot long.
b. Tie an overhand knot in the end of the detonating cord.
c. Slide the 20 gram Detaprime booster onto the detonating cord up to the overhand
knot.
d. Finish construction of the charge using one of two methods.
•
Option 1. Insert the detonating cord and booster into the water inside bottle.
When using a bottle, bore a hole through the cap so that the detonating cord feeds
through it and can be attached to the firing system. A wire can be used to keep
detonation cord rigid and centered inside the bottle.
•
Option 2. Place the detonating cord and booster between two IV bags making
sure it is centered. Completely tape the bags together using 100-mph tape. Use
the excess detonation cord for attaching the firing system. This is the
recommended method.
3. Size the target up. Determine the best placement to facilitate the breach.
4. Emplace the charge. Emplace the charge using one of two methods
•
Option 1. For light metal doors, hang the charge so it is centered on the door
(Figure 1).
NOTE: A prop stick may be used, but will produce secondary fragmentation up to 100
meters to the rear.
________________________________________________________________
II-66
071-SL2-XX15
•
Option 2. For wooden doors, hang the charge from the doorknob to defeat the
locking mechanism.
NOTE: The doorknob will become a missile hazard.
CARD BOARD WITH
BREACHERS PASTE
OR HYDRO-GEL.
DETONATING
CORD
Figure 1. Water Impulse Charge placed to defeat a light metal door.
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a water impulse charge to breach a
________________________________________________________________
II-67
071-SL2-XX15
wooden door.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
P
F
2. Construct the water impulse charge.
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
FM 5-250
Related
Ranger TC 350-1-2
________________________________________________________________
II-68
071-SL2-XX16
CONSTRUCT AND EMPLOY A MOLOTOV COCKTAIL
071-SL2-XX16
CONDITIONS
materials to construct and employ a Molotov Cocktail.
STANDARDS
Properly construct and employ the Molotov Cocktail.
NOTE: The Molotov Cocktail can be employed to engage both wheeled and tracked
vehicles. When employed against vehicles, it can obscure the vision of a vehicle's
crew and set the vehicle afire. The burning vehicle creates smoke and heat that will
asphyxiate and burn the crew if they do not abandon the vehicle. This device can
also initiate fires in urban structures and suppress individual/crew served positions.
WARNING
Ensure that a safe distance is maintained when throwing the Molotov
cocktail. Caution troops against dropping the device. Throw it in the
opposite direction of personnel and flammable materials. Do not smoke
while making this device.
________________________________________________________________
II-69
071-SL2-XX16
•
Container-bottle or glass container.
•
Gas (60 percent).
•
Oil (40 percent).
•
Rag for use as a wick.
2. Construct the Molotov Cocktail.
a. Mix the gas and oil thoroughly (60 percent gas to 40 percent oil).
b. Soak the rag with the mixture, and then pour the mixture into the bottle.
c. Insert the rag in the opening of the bottle. The rag will serve as a wick. The wick
must extend both into the mixture and out of the container.
3. Size the target up. In the case of the Molotov Cocktail, determine the most effective use
of the device against the proposed target. Ensure a covered and concealed position is selected
where the wick can be lit. Ensure that the covered and concealed position has been prepared
for flame operations.
4. Employ the device. Light the wick and throw the bottle at the target. Ensure the bottle is
thrown hard enough to break.
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a Molotov Cocktail.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
________________________________________________________________
II-70
071-SL2-XX16
P
F
2. Construct the Molotov Cocktail.
P
F
P
F
4. Employ the device.
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
FM 21-75
Related
________________________________________________________________
II-71
071-SL2-XX17
A BUNKER BOMB
071-SL2-XX17
CONDITIONS
materials to construct, emplace, and detonate a Bunker Bomb.
STANDARDS
Properly construct, emplace, and detonate the Bunker Bomb.
NOTE: The Bunker Bomb is an expedient explosive flame weapon best used against fortified
positions or rooms.
M4 , and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hand from the weapon
•
Small-arms ammunition container.
•
1 gallon of gasoline.
•
50 feet of detonating cord.
•
________________________________________________________________
II-72
071-SL2-XX17
•
3 ounces of M4 thickening compound.
•
1 M49 trip flare or M34 WP grenade.
2. Construct the bunker bomb charge.
a. Fill the ammunition can 3/4 full with thickened flame fuel and secure the lid.
b. "Hasty whip" the device with 15 turns around the center of the container using 44
feet of detonating cord. Leave 2-foot "pigtails" for attaching the igniter and fuse igniter.
c. Tape securely the igniter (M49 trip flare or M34 WP grenade) to the container
handle.
d. Tape the one detonating cord pigtail under the igniter spoon handle.
e. Attach the initiating set to the other pigtail.
3. Size the target up. Determine the best employment location to defeat the target and
provide the maximum cover, concealment, and safety of friendly personnel.
4. Emplace the bunker bomb.
5. Detonate the Bunker Bomb.
a. Remove the safety pin from the igniter (M49 trip flare or M34 WP grenade). The
device is ready to be fired.
b. Initiate the firing system.
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a bunker bomb charge.
EVALUATION GUIDE
________________________________________________________________
II-73
071-SL2-XX17
Results
P
F
2. Construct the Bunker Bomb.
P
F
P
F
4. Detonate the Bunker Bomb.
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
Related
________________________________________________________________
II-74
051-193-1007
STP 5-12B1-SM
PRIME EXPLOSIVES WITH DETONATING CORD
051-193-1007
CONDITIONS
Given explosives, detonating cord, M2 crimpers, a demolition knife, M1 detonating cord
clips, adhesive tape, and string.
STANDARDS
The soldier must perform the following:
1. Prime explosives with detonating cord so that the explosive will detonate when the cord is
detonated.
2. Construct ring main with branch lines and make detonating cord connections.
CAUTION
abrasions.
________________________________________________________________
II-75
STP 5-12B1-SM
051-193-1007
1. Prime demolition blocks.
a. Use the assured detonation method to affix a nonelectric-blasting cap to the end of
the detonating cord and to place it in the demolition block. Use the same procedures as the
time fuse in the nonelectric (initiation) detonating assembly.
b. Use the common method to lay one end of the detonating cord at an angle across
the explosive. Wrap the running end three times around the block and lay the end at an angle.
On the fourth wrap, slip the running end under all wraps parallel to the other end and draw
tightly as shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1. Common method.
c. Alternate methods.
(1) Tie the detonating cord around the explosive block (on top of the booster,
if present) with a clove hitch with two extra turns. The cord must fit snugly against the blocks
and the loop must be pushed close together (Figure 2).
Figure 2. Alternate number one.
(2) Place a loop of detonating cord on the explosive with four wraps around
the block and loop. The running end is pulled through the eye of the loop and tightened (Figure
3).
________________________________________________________________
II-76
051-193-1007
STP 5-12B1-SM
Figure 3. Alternate number two.
NOTE: This method is more applicable to short rather than long detonating cord branch lines
or primers.
2. Prime plastic explosives.
a. To prime plastic explosives with detonating cord, form either the overhand, triple
roll, or Uli knot (Figure 4).
Figure 4. Knots.
b. Insert the knot into a block of explosive or a molded piece of explosive as shown.
In either case, ensure that there is at least 1/2 inch of explosive on all sides of the knot. When
using the Uli knot, a minimum of 1 inch of explosive must be on the end of the knot (Figure 5).
________________________________________________________________
II-77
STP 5-12B1-SM
051-193-1007
Figure 5. Insert knots.
3. Prime dynamite by lacing the detonating cord through dynamite. This is used mainly for
boreholes, ditches, or stump removal. Punch four equally spaced holes through the dynamite
stick and lace the detonating cord through them (Figure 6).
Figure 6. Detonating cord.
4. Prime a 40-pound ammonium nitrate cratering charge.
a. Pass the end of the detonating cord through the tunnel on the side of the can.
b. Tie an overhand knot on the portion that passed through at least 6 inches from the
end (Figure 7).
________________________________________________________________
II-78
051-193-1007
STP 5-12B1-SM
Figure 7. Detonating cord.
5. Prime shaped charges with detonating cord by the assured detonating method only.
6. Make detonating cord connections.
a. Splice the ends of the detonating cord using a square knot pulled tightly. At least a
6-inch length should be left free at each side of the knot. When fabric is used to cover the
detonating cord, the fabric must not be removed.
b. Splice ends of detonating cord by overlapping them about 12 inches, using two
clips, one at each end of the overlap, and bending the tongues of the clips firmly over both
strands. Secure the connection by bending the trough end of the clip back over the tongue
(Figure 8).
Figure 8. Splicing detonation cord.
7. Make branch line connections.
a. Ensure the angle formed by the branch line and the cap end of the main line is not
less than 90 degrees from the direction from which the blast is coming; at a smaller angle, the
branch line may be blown off the main line without being detonated. At least 6 inches of the
running end of the branch line is left free beyond the tie (Figure 9).
________________________________________________________________
II-79
STP 5-12B1-SM
051-193-1007
Figure 9. Branch line connections.
b. Fasten a branch line to the main line by means of a girth hitch with one extra turn.
Connect branch lines of the detonating cord by clipping the branch line with the U-shaped
trough of the clip and the main line with the tongue of the clip (Figure 10).
Figure 10. Branch line connections.
8. Construct a detonating cord firing system. Form a ring main by bringing the main line back
in the form of a loop and attaching it to itself with a girth hitch with one extra turn or an M1
detonating cord clip. This will detonate an unlimited number of charges. The ring main makes
the detonation of all charges more positive because the detonating wave approaches the branch
lines from both directions and the charges will be detonated even when there is one break in the
ring main.
9. Connect branch lines perpendicular to the ring main, using a girth hitch with one extra turn
or an M1 detonating cord clip.
NOTE: Kinks in lines should be avoided, and curves and angles should not be sharp. Any
number of branch lines may be connected to the ring main. A branch line is never
connected at a point where the ring main is spliced.
NOTE: Avoid crossing lines. If this is necessary, be sure to have at least 1 foot of clearance
at all points between the detonating cords. Otherwise, the cords will cut each other
and destroy the firing system.
________________________________________________________________
II-80
051-193-1007
STP 5-12B1-SM
10. Attach an electric or a nonelectric (initiation) detonating assembly. Splice the cap of either
detonating assembly to the ring main, using an M1 detonating cord clip, string, or adhesive
tape. Allow at least a 6-inch length of ring main free beyond the splice as shown in Figure 11.
Figure 11. Splicing the detonation cord.
NOTE: As an alternate method, splice the cap to a 3-foot length of detonating cord. Then
join the ring main and a 3-foot length with a square knot.
Setup: During training and evaluation, inert items may be used in place of some material given
in the conditions.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier to prime explosives with detonating cord using the type of
explosives specified and to construct a ring main, using multiple explosives. These need not be
constructed during the same training session. Inform the soldier to use either an electric or a
nonelectric detonating assembly to prime the detonating cord.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Primes demolition blocks.
P
F
2. Primes plastic explosives.
P
F
3. Primes dynamite.
P
F
4. Primes a 40-pound ammonium nitrate cratering charge.
P
F
5. Primes shaped charges with detonating cord by the assured detonating method.
P
F
6. Makes detonating cord connections.
Results
P
F
________________________________________________________________
II-81
STP 5-12B1-SM
051-193-1007
7. Makes branch line connections.
P
F
9. Connects branch lines perpendicular to the ring main.
P
F
10. Attaches an electric or a nonelectric (initiation) detonating assembly.
P
F
8. Constructs a detonating cord firing system.
P
F
FEEDBACK
Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed (P) when the firing system is constructed as
specified. If the charge fails to detonate, determine if the cause is equipment failure. If this is
the case, do not score the soldier NO-GO if a step is not failed (F) for any other reason;
demonstrate the task, and have the soldier practice until the firing system is constructed as
specified.
REFERENCES
FM 5-250
Explosives and Demolitions
FM 5-34
Engineer Field Data Handbook
GTA 5-10-19
Explosives and Demolitions PT II; Methods and Priming
GTA 5-10-28
Demolition Card
MM2605
Demolition Firing Systems
TF 5-3583
Demolition Detonating Cord Priming
TM 9-1375-213-12 Operator's and Organizational Maintenance Manual (Including Repair
Parts and Special Tools List) Demolition Material
________________________________________________________________
II-82
051-193-1103
STP 7-12B-SM-TG
PRIME EXPLOSIVES USING MODERNIZED DEMOLITION
INITIATORS (MDI)
051-193-1103
CONDITIONS
You are given quarter-pound blocks of TNT, a priming adapter, string, a sandbag, M2
crimpers, and a section of M11 branch line. Some iterations should be performed in MOPP
4.
STANDARDS
You will prime the TNT with MDI--with and without the priming adapter--so that the blasting
cap remains in the cap well and is not damaged or handled in a way that could cause detonation
of the explosive while priming. The time required to perform this task will be increased when
conducting it in MOPP 4.
CAUTION
abrasions.
________________________________________________________________
II-83
STP 7-12B-SM-TG
051-193-1103
M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both handsfrom the weapon
NOTE: Perform all steps in sequence.
1. Step 1. Prime TNT using a priming adapter.
a. Use the pointed end of the crimpers to punch a hole in the paper covering the cap
well of the block of TNT. Inspect the cap well. Ensure that there is nothing that will prevent
the cap from fully seating in the charge's cap well.
b. Place the M11 blasting cap under a sandbag.
c. Cut off the sealed end of the M11 branch line, remove the J-hook, and slide the
priming adapter onto the M11 branch line until it seats on the blasting cap.
d. Remove the blasting cap from under the sandbag and secure in hand. Ensure that
the blasting cap is completely enclosed in the hand and that the shock tube is going over the
thumb.
e. Insert the blasting-cap end of the shock tube into the cap well of the TNT and
tighten down the priming adapter.
2. Step 2. Prime the TNT without using a priming adapter.
a. Prepare the block.
•
Use the pointed end of the crimpers to punch a hole in the paper covering the cap
well and inspect the block.
•
Ensure that there is nothing that will prevent the cap from fully seating in the charge's
cap well.
•
Wrap the string around the block four times while ensuring that the tails are the
same lengths.
•
Secure the wraps with a nonslip knot such as a square knot.
b. Secure the M11 blasting cap under the sandbag and insert it into the TNT block.
c. Bend the M11 branch line over and secure it to the charge using electrical tape.
________________________________________________________________
II-84
051-193-1103
STP 7-12B-SM-TG
Setup: Provide the soldier with the items listed in the conditions. Use inert explosives when
performing this task. Observe the soldier's performance for any improper procedures.
Brief soldier: Prime explosives using MDI, in sequence, without causing detonation or
damage to the equipment or personnel. Safety will be integrated, observed, and evaluated at
all times. The soldier will have 10 minutes to perform this task.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Primes TNT using priming adapter.
P
F
2. Primes TNT without using priming adapter.
P
F
FEEDBACK
Score the soldier GO if all steps are properly completed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any
step is not properly completed. If the soldier does not properly complete any step, show the
soldier how to correct the mistake(s). The soldier is expected to review the task steps and
performance measures and to practice the task until he performs it correctly.
REFERENCES
Required
FM 5-250
Related
________________________________________________________________
II-85
STP 7-12B-SM-TG
051-193-1055
CONSTRUCT A NONELECTRIC INITIATING ASSEMBLY WITH
MODERNIZED DEMOLITION INITIATORS (MDI)
051-193-1055
CONDITIONS
You have been given detonating cord, an M11 branch line, an M12 transmission line, an M81
fuse ignitor, an M14 time-delay fuse, an M9 holder, J-hooks, adhesive tape, a sandbag, and
M2 crimpers. Some iterations should be performed in mission-oriented protective posture
(MOPP) 4.
STANDARDS
You will construct a nonelectric initiating assembly using MDI correctly and in sequence. You
will attach the assembly to a detonating-cord firing system so that, when initiated, it will
detonate as if it were live. The time required to perform this task will be increased when
conducting it in MOPP 4.
CAUTION
R-14C,
Personal Protection
Kit Version
C:of the
Before
enteringsling
and clearing
buildings,
R-21, Hands-Free
Sling: Consider
the use
hands-free
for the M-16
series,
squad
members
should
use
special
protective
gloves
and
sleeves
to
protect
against
cuts
and
abrasions.
1. Step 1. Turn the end cap of the M81 fuse igniter a half turn counterclockwise and remove
both the shipping plug and the shock-tube adapter from the igniter.
2. Step 2. Cut off the sealed end of the M14 time-delay fuse and insert it into the end cap of
________________________________________________________________
II-86
051-193-1055
STP 7-12B-SM-TG
the M81. Tighten (finger-tight) by turning the end cap clockwise.
3. Step 3. Attach the blasting-cap end of the M14 time-delay fuse to the existing detonatingcord ring/line main using either an M9 holder or adhesive tape. If using tape, ensure that the
tape is at least 6 inches from the end of the detonating cord.
a. Attach the M14 blasting cap using the M9 holder (the preferred method).
•
Open both hinged flaps of the M9 holder.
•
Insert the blasting cap into the M9 holder and close the small hinged flap.
•
Form a bight 6 inches from the end of the detonating cord, lay it in the M9 holder,
and close the hinged flap.
b. Secure the detonating cord into the M9 holder. Secure the door with adhesive
tape.
4. Step 4. Construct a nonelectric initiating assembly using the M11 branch line and the M12
transmission line.
a. Place the M11 branch line's blasting cap under a sandbag near the detonating-cord
firing system.
b. Attach the M11 branch line to the M12 transmission line by forming a bight at the
end of the M11, laying it in the attached M9 holder on the M12, and closing the hinged flap.
Tape and secure the M11 into place. Place the M9 holder, along with the M12, under the
same sandbag as the M11 blasting cap.
c. Retrieve the M11 blasting cap from under the sandbag. Attach it to the detonatingcord firing system using an M9 holder as described above using either the M14 or adhesive
tape. Ensure that the tape is at least 6 inches from the end of the detonating cord.
d. Secure the transmission line to a nearby anchor point and run the M12 transmission
line back to the initiating point.
e. Cut the sealed end of the M12 transmission line at the initiating point and attach an
M81 fuse igniter as described above for the M14 time-delay fuse.
Setup: Provide the soldier with the items listed in the conditions. Observe the soldier's
________________________________________________________________
II-87
STP 7-12B-SM-TG
051-193-1055
performance for any improper procedures. All steps must be done in sequence and correctly
to pass.
Brief soldier: The soldier must construct a nonelectric initiating assembly correctly and in
sequence and attach the initiating assembly to a detonating-cord firing system such that, when
initiated, it will detonate as if it were live. Safety will be integrated, observed, and evaluated
at all times.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Remove the shipping plug and shock tube adapter from igniter.
P
F
2. Cut the sealed end of the M14 and insert into the end cap of the M81
and tighten.
P
F
P
F
3. Attach the M14 blasting cap to detonating cord ring/line.
4. Construct non-electric initiating assembly M11 branch line
and M12 transmission line.
P
F
FEEDBACK
step is not properly completed. If the soldier does not properly complete any step, the trainer
must show the soldier how to correct the mistake(s). The soldier is expected to review the
task steps and performance measures and to practice the task until he performs it correctly.
REFERENCES
Required
FM 5-250
Related
________________________________________________________________
II-88
051-193-1202
STP 7-12B-SM-TG
CONSTRUCT A DUAL-FIRING SYSTEM WITH MODERNIZED
DEMOLITION INITIATORS (MDI)
051-193-1202
CONDITIONS
You are given detonating cord, an M11 branch line, an M12 transmission line, an M14 timedelay fuse, priming adapters, M9 holders, M81 fuse igniters, quarter-pound blocks of TNT,
M2 crimpers, a sandbag, and adhesive tape. Some iterations should be performed in MOPP
4.
STANDARDS
You will dual prime each charge using a combination of both MDI and detonating cord. You
will correctly tie the charges into a combination firing system (also consisting of MDI and
detonating cord) so the charges will detonate. The time required to perform this task will be
increased when conducting it in MOPP 4.
NOTE: Perform all of the steps in sequence.
1. Step 1. Construct a detonating-cord firing/detonating system.
a. Lay out the line main/ring main.
b. Prime blocks of explosives with detonating cord.
c. Tie the primed explosives into the line main using a girth hitch with an extra turn.
2. Step 2. Construct an MDI firing/detonating system.
a. Lay out the M12 transmission line from the detonating point to the firing point.
b. Connect the M11 branch line to the M12 transmission line using an M9 holder.
c. Prime the block of explosive with the M11 branch-line shock tube using a priming
adapter.
________________________________________________________________
II-89
STP 7-12B-SM-TG
051-193-1202
d. Tape the MDI primed block to the detonating-cord-primed block.
3. Step 3. Construct the MDI time-delay initiating system.
a. Remove the M14 time-delay fuse from its sealed package.
b. Cut off the factory-crimped seal from the end of the M14 with crimpers.
c. Attach the M81 fuse igniter to the M14.
d. Attach the M14 to the detonating cord using either an M9 holder or adhesive tape.
4. Step 4. Construct an MDI initiating system.
a. Ensure that the connection between the M11 branch line and the M12 are secure.
b. Cut off the factory crimp from the M12 with crimpers.
c. Connect the M81 igniter to the M12 transmission line.
d. From a safe location, initiate the M81 and MDI firing system when ready.
Setup: Provide the soldier with the items listed in the conditions. Use inert explosives when
evaluating the soldier's performance for any improper procedures. All steps must be done in
sequence and correctly to pass.
Brief soldier: Construct a dual-firing system, in sequence, without detonating the explosive or
causing damage to the equipment or personnel. Safety will be integrated, observed, and
evaluated at all times. The soldier will have 10 minutes to perform this task.
EVALUATION GUIDE
1. Construct a detonating-cord firing/detonating system.
Results
P
F
________________________________________________________________
II-90
051-193-1202
STP 7-12B-SM-TG
2. Construct an MDI firing/detonating system.
P
F
3. construct the MDI time delay initiating system.
4. Construct an MDI initiating system.
P
P
F
F
FEEDBACK
step is not properly completed. If the soldier does not properly complete any step, the trainer
must show the soldier how to correct the mistake(s). The soldier is expected to review the
task steps and performance measures and to practice the task until he performs it correctly.
REFERENCES
Required
None
Related
________________________________________________________________
II-91
SECTION III
SKILL LEVEL 3
III-1
III-2
071-SL3-XXX1
CONDUCT ENTRY TO A BUILDING
071-SL3-XXX1
CONDITIONS
As a rifle squad leader of an assault element in urban terrain with the enemy location and
strength uncertain. Given an individual weapon with ammunition and LCE. Given a squad
with a mission of entering a building. The squad is equipped with all TO&E equipment
authorized. Given a designated route to the building, breach (entry) point, breaching
technique, and supported by organic platoon weapons. Both enemy forces and
noncombatants could be found in the building. Given specific Rules of Engagement (ROE).
STANDARDS
Plan, prepare, and execute an entry into a building. Communicate ROE to all members of the
squad.
available to a squad leader. The squad may have to operate with "no fire" areas.
use of weapons in their planning for missions on urban terrain.
knees
duePersonal
to hard surfaces
encountered
in built
areas,conducting
all soldiersoperations
are encouraged
to
R-14C,
Protection
Kit Version
C:upWhen
in urban
wear
Personal
Protection
Equipment.
and abrasions.
CAUTION
________________________________________________________________
III-3
071-SL3-XXX1
Hands-Free
Consider
the usethe
of the
hands-free
sling for the M-16 series,
1.R-21,
Receive
the order. Sling:
Thoroughly
understand
mission.
Know—
and still
weapon
pointed
a. have
Thethe
route
the squad
willtowards
use. the enemy and easy to get to.
b. The breach (entry) point.
c. The breaching technique.
d. The ROE in effect at the time of the mission.
2. Inform the squad members of the mission. Communicate ROE to all members of the
squad.
3. Organize the squad into assault, support, and breaching elements, as required.
a. The assault element consists of three or four personnel. The exact number and size
is based on the factors of METT-T. The assault element carries as much ammunition as
possible, especially extra grenades.
b. The breaching element could be part of the assault element or could be a separate
element based upon considerations of METT-T and the type of breach. A team leader
normally handles a demolition breach or another team member handles a mechanical or ballistic
breach. Supporting elements such as tanks or BFVs can be utilized as the breaching element
for the initial breach depending on the ROE.
c. If there is a squad support element, it consists of the remaining members of the
squad. The support element provides fire support for the assault force. The support element
lessens the effects of enemy defensive fires during movement to the objective. It suppresses
and or impairs enemy gunners within the objective building and adjacent buildings. It isolates
the objective building with direct and indirect fires to prevent enemy withdrawal, reinforcement,
or counterattack during the entry using direct fire weapons to destroy enemy positions. It also
provides replacements and ammunition to the assault force, as required.
NOTE: Support may be provided by the platoon and the squad may not have a support
element.
R-8, Remote Marking Munitions: Additionally, consideration should be given to the
use of the M203 TPT round as a remote marking munition to facilitate fire control, fire
distribution, lifting and shifting of fires, and marking an entry point.
WARNING
The M203 TPT round has a metal projectile body that can ricochet and cause
________________________________________________________________
injuries.
III-4
R-27, Man Size Hole: Leaders should consider the use of the Beast or Explosive Cutting
VERSION
APRILman
1999
Tape (ECT)7,for1creating
sized breaches both on the exterior and interior of buildings
allowing soldiers access for assaulting and movement in and through buildings.
071-SL3-XXX1
R-30A, Breaching Devices: When explosives cannot be used or are not appropriate or
4. Conduct a leader’s reconnaissance. Based upon the amount of time given, look at the
designated route to the building, the breach (entry) point, suspected enemy positions that may
need to be suppressed based upon the ROE, and possible positions for the assault element to
occupy prior to and during the breach.
5. Conduct rehearsals. If time is available, rehearsals for the actions during the breach should
be conducted. Consideration should be given to rehearsing movement techniques.
6. Ensure that the support element is positioned to provide fire support for the assault and
breaching elements.
7. Conduct movement only after the building has been isolated by the support element. Move
the assault element to the last covered and concealed position prior to the breach (entry) point
using available cover and concealment, to include smoke provided by the support element.
Ensure the assault element arrives at the breach (entry) point undetected if a stealthy breach is
required and in the correct order for the designated breach. During movement, report
progress to the platoon leader and any situation that would affect the accomplishment of the
mission.
8. Ensure the assault element is ready to conduct the breach and enter.
9. Signal the assault element to execute the breach. Immediately after the breach, if
consistent with the ROE, ensure that a grenade or distraction device of the appropriate type is
thrown into the breach (entry) point before the assault element enters.
a. The assault and or breaching element move to the breach (entry) point to conduct
the breach unless the breach is a stand-off ballistic breach. For a stand-off ballistic breach by
RLEM or armored vehicle, the assault element must remain far enough away to prevent
injuries. Immediately after the breach, the assault element moves through the breach (entry)
point.
________________________________________________________________
III-5
071-SL3-XXX1
b. For an explosive breach, the assault element must remain far enough away to
prevent injuries. Immediately after the charge is detonated, the assault element moves through
the breach (entry) point.
c. For other types of breaches, the assault element may or may not be next to the
breach (entry) point at the time of the breach. Immediately after the breach, the assault
element moves through the breach (entry) point.
10. Shift supporting fires to the upper windows and then to adjacent buildings as the assault
element enters the building from ground level or, shift to lower windows when the assault
element enters through an upper story. ROE may prevent firing until enemy positions are
confirmed.
11. Direct the assault element to enter and secure a foothold in the building IAW MTP Tasks
7-3/4-XXX7, Establish a Foothold in a Building and 7-3/4-XXX7, Establish a Foothold in an
Upper Story of a Building using appropriate techniques IAW ROE
inhabitants, leaders should consider the use of 5.56-mm and 7.62-mm Controlled
Penetration Ammunition (CPA) “Soft Round” which will penetrate human bodies/walls and
then stop either in the body or in the wall.
WARNING
be so limited. This could place the unit at a sever disadvantage.
12. Move through breach (entry) point with assault element or immediately afterward.
13. Verify that the foothold is cleared and mark the breach (entry) point IAW unit SOP.
Ensure that checks have been made for: inhabitants, weapons present, and possible points of
entry/exit. If necessary, leave security in the foothold. Indicate progress to friendly forces by
marking clearing on the exterior and interior of buildings. Report to the platoon leader that a
foothold has been gained. Report and mark mines and booby traps.
________________________________________________________________
III-6
071-SL3-XXX1
14. Direct consolidation and reorganization.
R-14B, Personal Protection Kit Version B: To prevent spreading contaminant
infections, soldiers should use protective gloves and masks to administer first aid to team
members, noncombatants, and prisoners of war, as the situation permits.
statement. Provide training aids appropriate to the task that simulate actual munitions and
demolitions.
R-31, Non-lethal Blunt Trauma Training Round: To enhance evaluation of the task
and to augment realism, non-lethal blunt trauma short-range training munitions should be
considered for use. These munitions can be fired from existing weapons platforms (M16
family of weapons/M4) with a change of upper receiver. The munitions come in two
colors, red and blue, making them ideal for force-on-force.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he will be leading a squad tasked to conduct the entry of a
building. The enemy strength and location are unknown.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Thoroughly understands the mission. Knows—
P
F
a. The route the squad will use.
2. Informs the squad members of the mission. Communicates ROE
to all members of the squad.
P F
________________________________________________________________
III-7
071-SL3-XXX1
3. Organizes the squad into assault, support, and
breaching elements, as required.
P
F
4. Conducts a leader’s reconnaissance.
P
F
5. Conducts a rehearsal, if time permits.
P
F
6. Ensures that the support element is positioned.
P
F
7. Controls movement.
P
F
8. Reports progress to the platoon leader and any situation
that would affect the accomplishment of the mission.
P
F
Results
9. Ensures assault element is ready to conduct the breach and enter.
P
F
10. Signals the assault element to execute the breach.
P
F
11. Ensures that the breach is executed.
P
F
12. Shifts the support element’s supporting fires.
P
F
P
F
P
F
13. Directs the assault element to enter and secure a foothold
in the building using appropriate techniques IAW ROE.
P
F
14. Moves through breach with assault element or immediately afterward.
15. Verifies clearance and marks breach (entry) point.
P
F
16. Reports accomplishment of mission to platoon leader.
17. Directs consolidation and reorganization.
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
Related
________________________________________________________________
III-8
071-SL3-XXX1
FM 7-7J
FM 7-8
FM 90-10-1
________________________________________________________________
III-9
071-SL3-XXX2
CONDUCT CLEARING OF A ROOM
071-SL3-XXX2
CONDITIONS
As the rifle squad leader of an assault element in urban terrain with the enemy location and
strength uncertain. Given an individual weapon with ammunition and LCE. A foothold has
already been secured in the building. The squad has already moved into the building as a
follow-on assault squad. The platoon continues clearing the building. You are directed to
conduct clearing of a room. The squad is equipped with all TO&E equipment authorized.
Both enemy forces and noncombatants could be found in the room. Given necessary
equipment to breach and clear the room. Given specific Rules of Engagement (ROE).
STANDARDS
Plan, prepare, and execute a mission to clear a room using techniques acceptable under the
ROE. Communicate the ROE to all squad members.
use of weapons in their planning for missions in urban terrain.
CAUTION
________________________________________________________________
III-10
071-SL3-XXX2
and abrasions.
1. Receive the order. Thoroughly understand the mission. Know—
b. The location of the breach (entry) point.
squad.
3. Organize the squad for room clearing.
a. Organize the squad into breaching, assault, and support elements. Designate a fire
team to clear the room and a fire team to provide support.
b. Alternately, organize the squad into two assault elements
c. Designate the breaching technique to use.
d. Assign the task to breach to a fire team or to a designated breacher.
designated route to the breach (entry) point, suspected enemy positions that may need to be
suppressed based upon the ROE, and possible positions for the assault element to occupy
prior to and during the breach.
5. Conduct rehearsals. If time is available, rehearsals for the actions during the breach should
6. If applicable, ensure that the support element is positioned to provide fire support for the
________________________________________________________________
III-11
071-SL3-XXX2
assault and breaching elements.
7. Control movement to the last covered and concealed position prior to the entry point using
available cover and concealment. Ensure the assault element arrives at the breach (entry) point
undetected if a stealthy breach is required and in the correct order for the designated breach.
During movement, report progress to the platoon leader and any situation that would affect the
accomplishment of the mission.
8. Ensure assault element is ready to conduct the breach and enter.
9. Signal the assault element to execute the breach. Immediately after the breach, if
consistent with the ROE, ensure that a grenade or distraction device of the appropriate type is
thrown into the room before the assault element enters. Depending on the type of breach, the
assault element may or may not be next to the breach (entry) point at the time of the breach.
Immediately after the breach, the assault element moves through the breach (entry) point.
10. Direct the assault element to enter and clear the room IAW MTP Task 7-3/4-XXX2,
Clear a room.
________________________________________________________________
III-12
071-SL3-XXX2
WARNING
be so limited. This could place the unit at a sever disadvantage.
11. Move through breach (entry) point with assault element or immediately afterward.
12. Verify that the room is cleared and mark the entry point IAW unit SOP. Ensure that
checks have been made for: inhabitants, weapons present, and possible points of entry/exit.
If necessary, leave security in the room. Indicate progress to friendly forces by marking
cleared rooms on the exterior and interior of buildings. Report to the platoon leader that the
room has been cleared.
________________________________________________________________
III-13
071-SL3-XXX2
statement. Provide training aids appropriate to the task that simulate actual munitions and
demolitions.
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that he will conduct the clearing of a room IAW ROE.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Thoroughly understands the mission. Knows—
P
F
P
F
3. Organizes the squad into assault, support, and
breaching elements, as required.
P
F
P
F
Results
________________________________________________________________
III-14
071-SL3-XXX2
P
F
6. Ensures that the support element is positioned.
P
F
P
F
P
F
11. Ensures that the breach is executed.
P
F
12. Shifts the support element’s supporting fires.
P
F
P
F
P
F
9. Ensures assault element is ready to conduct the breach and enter.
P
F
10. Signals the assault element to execute the breach.
P
F
13. Directs the assault element to enter and clear the room
in the building using appropriate techniques IAW ROE.
P
F
14. Moves through breach with assault element or immediately afterward.
15. Verifies clearance and marks breach (entry) point.
P
F
16. Reports accomplishment of mission to platoon leader.
P
F
FEEDBACK
Score the soldier a GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier a NO-GO if any steps are
failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show him what was done wrong and how to do it
correctly.
REFERENCES
Required
FM 7-7J
FM 7-8
Related
FM 90-10-1
________________________________________________________________
III-15
071-SL3-XXX3
TP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
CONDUCT MOVEMENT THROUGH A HALLWAY
OR SUBTERRANEAN PASSAGEWAY
071-SL3-XXX3
CONDITIONS
As the rifle squad leader of an element in urban terrain with the enemy location and strength
uncertain. Given an individual weapon with ammunition and LCE. A foothold has already
been secured in the building or in the subterranean passageway. You are directed to move
through a hallway or subterranean passageway. The squad is equipped with all TO&E
equipment authorized in addition to ammunition, grenades, and pyrotechnics. Both enemy
forces and noncombatants could be found in the hallway or subterranean passageway. Given
specific Rules of Engagements (ROE).
STANDARDS
Plan, prepare, and execute a requirement to move through a hallway or subterranean
passageway using techniques acceptable under the ROE. Communicate ROE to all members
of the squad.
________________________________________________________________
III-16
71-SL3-XXX3
CAUTION
and abrasions.
1. Receive the order. Thoroughly understand the requirement. Know—
b. The ROE in effect at the time of the mission.
squad.
3. Organize the squad for movement through a hallway or subterranean passageway. Ideally,
the squad leader will maneuver his fire teams. However, there might be times when the best
organization would be to break fire teams into two 2-man buddy teams. The size and length of
hallways and passageways will determine how the squad moves. Movement in hallways and
passageways is similar to movement down streets and alleys.
designated route and suspected enemy positions that may need to be suppressed based upon
the ROE.
5. Conduct rehearsals. If time is available, rehearsals for the actions during movement should
be conducted.
________________________________________________________________
III-17
071-SL3-XXX3
TP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
6. If applicable, ensure that the support element is positioned to provide fire support.
7. Control movement. Move with the lead fire team, positioning self so as not to interfere
with team members’ line of sight or fields of fire. During movement, report progress to the
platoon leader and any situation that would affect the accomplishment of the mission.
8. Ensure the squad uses visual signal techniques until the element of surprise is lost.
Communication between squad members should be rehearsed and understood by all.
9. Ensure the team leaders select an appropriate movement formation.
a. The Cross-cover formation. This formation is used when the lead fire team is
moving down a hallway or passageway and the second fire team or security element is covering
the rear of the lead element. The numbers one and two men move down the hallway abreast
providing security to the immediate front on opposite sides of the hallway. The number three
and four man move abreast of each other to the rear and inside of the two men providing
security to the front far down the hallway (Figure 1).
Figure 1. Cross cover formation.
b. The Serpentine formation. This formation is used when the fire team is in the
traveling technique or being overwatched by another element. The serpentine technique is used
in narrow hallways or passageways. The number one man provides security to the front. His
sector of fire includes any enemy soldiers who appear at the far end of the hall or from any
doorways near the end. The number two and number three men cover the left and right sides
of the number one man. Their sectors of fire include any soldiers who appear suddenly from
nearby doorways on either side of the hall. They cover the number one man's flanks. The
number four man provides rear protection against any enemy soldiers suddenly appearing
________________________________________________________________
III-18
71-SL3-XXX3
behind the clearing team. If the remainder of the squad is providing security for this fire team,
it will not have to provide its own rear security and the number four man can face forward,
although his fires will be masked by the rest of the fire team (Figure 2).
Figure 2. Serpentine formation for narrow hallways.
c. The Rolling-T formation. The formation is used when the fire team is in the
traveling technique or being overwatched by another element. The rolling-T technique is used
in wide hallways. The number one and number two men move abreast, covering the opposite
side of the hallway. The number three man covers the far end of the hallway from a position
behind the number one and number two men, firing between them. Once again, the number
four man provides rear security. If the remainder of the squad is providing security for this fire
team, it will not have to provide its own rear security and the number four man can face
forward, although his fires will be masked by the rest of the fire team (Figure 3).
________________________________________________________________
III-19
071-SL3-XXX3
TP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
Figure 3. Rolling-T formation for wide hallways.
d. The file formation if in an extremely narrow hallway or subterranean passageway.
10. Ensure the squad treats hallway/passageway entry points such as intersections and 90degree corners as danger areas IAW MTP Task 7-3/4-XX12, Perform actions at and cross a
danger area in urban terrain. Hallway and passageway intersections are danger areas and
should be approached cautiously. If the unit is clearing the building, connecting hallways and
rooms off of hallways should not be bypassed because this potentially leaves enemy to the rear
of the unit. If the decision has been made to move through the hallway without clearing every
room and connecting hallway or passageway, the squad moves past entry points such as
corners or intersections:
a. Using an assault element to treat it as a danger area.
OR
b. The assault element leader or a designated soldier may observe around the corner.
OR
c. The squad leader elects to use a single fire team or both fire teams to move around
the corner or T-shaped intersection in order to proceed in that direction (Figure 4):
• The number one man squats down to a low position and observes around the
________________________________________________________________
III-20
71-SL3-XXX3
corner.
Figure 4. Hallway intersection clearing positions and sectors of fire.
•
The number two man moves up to a high position and observes around the corner
while looking over the number one man.
•
The number three man steps out and pulls frontal security.
•
The number two man lets the number one man know that he is ready.
•
The number one man steps off and the number two man does the same
________________________________________________________________
III-21
071-SL3-XXX3
TP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
simultaneously.
•
The sectors of fire are split down the hallway. The number one man secures the far
side and the number two man secures the near side.
•
After the sectors are cleared, the fire team moves down the hallway.
•
The unit continues movement using hallway movement techniques.
NOTE: A T-shaped hallway or passageway entry may be cleared in the same manner, using
one or two fire teams (Figure 5).
________________________________________________________________
III-22
71-SL3-XXX3
Figure 5. T-shaped hallway intersection clearing positions.
11. Rotate teams as needed during movement.
12. If required, position security teams at the breach (entry) points once movement is
conducted.
13. Report to the platoon leader upon completion of the movement.
statement. Provide training aids appropriate to the task that simulate actual munitions.
________________________________________________________________
III-23
071-SL3-XXX3
TP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that as the squad leader, he will conduct the movement through
a hallway or subterranean passageway.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Thoroughly understands the mission. Knows the route the squad will use. P
F
Results
P
F
3. Organizes the squad as required.
P
F
P
F
P
F
7. Ensures the team leaders select appropriate formations,
organizations, and movement techniques to move through
the hallway or subterranean passageway.
P
F
8. Ensures the squad members use nonverbal signal techniques
until the element of surprise is lost.
P
F
9. Ensures the clearing team clears hallway entry points.
P
F
10. Positions security as needed.
P
F
6. Controls movement. Moves with the lead fire team, positioning self
so as not to interfere with team members’ line of sight or fields of fire.
P
F
P F
________________________________________________________________
III-24
71-SL3-XXX3
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
FM 7-7J
FM 7-8
Related
FM 90-10-1
________________________________________________________________
III-25
071-SL3-XXX4
CONDUCT CLEARING OF A STAIRCASE
071-SL3-XXX4
CONDITIONS
Acting as a rifle squad leader of an assault element in an urban environment with the enemy
location and strength uncertain. Given an individual weapon with ammunition and LCE. A
foothold has already been secured in the building. The squad has already moved into the
building as a follow-on assault squad. The platoon continues clearing the building. You are
directed to clear a staircase. The squad is equipped with all TO&E equipment authorized in
addition to ammunition, grenades, and pyrotechnics. Starting at either the top of the staircase
and clearing down, or at the bottom and clearing to the top. The enemy NBC capabilities are
unknown. Both enemy forces and noncombatants could be found in the staircase. Given
STANDARDS
Plan, prepare, and execute the clearing of a staircase. Establish and maintain 360-degree and
vertical security and minimize unnecessary exposure to possible threat fires. Communicate the
ROE to the squad members.
CAUTION
________________________________________________________________
III-26
071-SL3-XXX4
and abrasions.
b. The ROE in effect at the time of the mission.
squad.
3. Organize the squad for staircase clearing. Designate fire teams to clear the stairwell and
ensure the team leaders designate clearing techniques to carry out the mission. Designates a
lead (clearing) team and trail (security)team.
a. Fire team flow.
b. Buddy team flow.
c. Any method based upon fundamentals of movement and security that fits the
particular staircase such as the three-man technique.
4. Conduct a leader’s reconnaissance. Based upon the amount of time given and the
situation, look at the designated route to the staircase, the staircase itself, and suspected
enemy positions that may need to be suppressed based upon the ROE.
5. Conduct rehearsals. If time is available, rehearsals for the actions during clearing should
7. Control movement to the last covered and concealed position prior to the staircase using
available cover and concealment. During movement, report progress to the platoon leader and
________________________________________________________________
III-27
071-SL3-XXX4
any situation that would affect the accomplishment of the mission.
8. Ensure the team locates, marks and bypasses or clears obstacles/booby traps blocking
access to the staircase.
9. Ensure three-dimensional and 360-degree security is maintained in the immediate vicinity of
the stairwell.
10. Signal to execute clearing.
11. Position self to control the movement of the fire teams.
12. Ensure that each landing is secure before continuing up/down additional flights. If
required, position security teams at the entry points. Treat entry points as danger areas IAW
MTP Task 7-3/4-XX12, Perform Actions at and Cross a Danger Area in Urban Terrain.
13. Rotate fire teams into the clearing process.
________________________________________________________________
III-28
071-SL3-XXX4
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that as the squad leader, he will conduct the clearing of a
staircase.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Thoroughly understands the mission. Knows the route the squad will use. P
F
3. Organizes the squad for staircase clearing.
P
P
F
F
a. Designates fire teams to clear the stairwell.
b. Ensures the team leaders designate clearing techniques to carry out the mission.
5. Conducts rehearsals if time permits.
P
P
F
F
Results
6. If applicable, ensures that the support element is positioned
to provide fire support.
P F
________________________________________________________________
III-29
071-SL3-XXX4
P
F
P
F
P
F
12. Ensures the clearing team clears staircase entry points.
P
F
13. Ensures security is established at each landing prior to
continuing up or down stairwells.
P
F
14. Rotates fire teams into the clearing process.
P
F
15. Ensures the squad members use visual signal techniques
P
F
16. Positions security as needed.
P
F
P
F
8. Ensures the team locates, marks and bypasses or clears obstacles/booby traps
blocking access to the staircase.
9. Ensures three-dimensional and 360-degree security is maintained
in the immediate vicinity of the stairwell.
P
F
10. Signals to execute clearing.
11. Positions self to control the movement of the fire teams.
P
P
F
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
FM 7-7J
FM 7-8
Related
FM 90-10-1
________________________________________________________________
III-30
071-SL3-XXX5
DESIGNATE PRIMARY, ALTERNATE, AND SUPPLEMENTARY
POSITIONS FOR SQUAD WEAPONS IN AN URBAN
ENVIRONMENT
071-SL3-XXX5
CONDITIONS
Acting as a rifle squad leader operating in an urban environment with the enemy location and
strength uncertain. Given an individual weapon with ammunition and LCE. Given a squad
with a mission to defend a sector or battle position with a left and right limit. The platoon
leader has already made initial placement of the crew-served weapons. The squad is equipped
with all TO&E equipment authorized in addition to ammunition, grenades, explosives,
pyrotechnics, and material to construct barriers and positions. Noncombatants could be
found in the area. Given specific Rules of Engagements (ROE).
STANDARDS
Designate primary, alternate, and supplementary positions. Communicate the ROE to all
squad members.
available to a squad leader. His squad may have to operate with "no fire" areas.
________________________________________________________________
III-31
071-SL3-XXX5
CAUTION
and abrasions.
a. The sector and limits.
b. Avenues of approach into the sector.
c. Withdrawal routes.
squad.
3. Position weapons to support the crew-served weapons. These positions must provide
interlocking sectors of fire and provide security for crew-served weapons. Consideration must
be given to fields of fire and avenues of approach Each position’s sector of fire should be
covered by at least two other positions. Crew-served weapons may be placed on the ground
floors or upper floors of buildings, dependent upon the type of weapon. In either case, crewserved weapons are dependent upon the squad for security. It is not necessary to place a
position side by side with a crew-served weapon to support it.
a. Primary position--the position within the squad sector from which the weapon can
best perform its mission.
________________________________________________________________
III-32
071-SL3-XXX5
b. Alternate position--a position to be occupied when the primary position can no
longer be manned and from which the same sector of fire can be covered.
c. Supplementary position--a position that provides the best location for the
completion of a task that cannot be completed from the primary or alternate positions, such as
covering additional avenues of approach and covering the flanks and rear of the platoons
position.
4. Place squad weapons where they have cover and concealment and good fields of fire.
a. Cover. Use natural cover to the greatest extent. Positions that are well prepared
will protect men and weapons from enemy fire. Complement natural cover with properly
prepared positions. Skill must be used in selecting positions that offer the soldier the best cover
and allows complete coverage of the area.
b. Concealment. Attempt to place positions as far back from loopholes and windows
as possible to conceal firing signatures of weapons. The enemy's greatest effort will be toward
locating the weapons that slow down his attack. Therefore, clever use of terrain and
camouflage is mandatory to deceive the enemy. The best concealment is to look natural.
c. Anti-armor weapons. Concentrate anti-armor weapons heavily on the enemy’s
most likely mounted avenue of approach. M72 LAW and AT-4 positions should offer flank or
rear shots. If frontal engagements are expected, position these weapons on upper levels to fire
down on the top of armored vehicles. Dragons and Javelins should be positioned so those
weapons have sufficient time and range for the missiles to arm.
d. M203s will be positioned to cover dead space. The first priority is to cover the
________________________________________________________________
III-33
071-SL3-XXX5
dead space for machineguns then to cover any other dead space. They may also be used
against lightly armored vehicles using the high explosive dual purpose (HEDP) round. Every
attempt should be made to engage lightly armored vehicles from the top since the armor is
thinnest at that point.
remote-marking munition to mark targets or TRPs and to facilitate fire control.
WARNING
cause injury
e. Position squad automatic weapons to cover the most likely infantry avenues of
approach. They should be placed as low as possible to allow for grazing fire. If grazing fire
cannot be achieved, then they may be placed on upper levels. In an urban environment,
armor and infantry normally work together so the most likely mounted and dismounted
approach may be the same.
3. Assign each position an alternate position that is normally located in an adjoining room on
the same level. Positions must provide dispersion and offer covered routes to alternate and
supplementary positions in an urban environment. Defending a built up area usually involves the
occupation of several buildings.
Setup: Provide an area in an urban environment with varying types of structures, and cover
and concealment. It must be large enough for primary, alternate, and supplementary fighting
positions for all squad weapons.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier his squad’s sector of responsibility and the probable direction of
attack. He will designate the primary, alternate, and supplementary positions for the squad
weapons.
EVALUATION GUIDE
1. Thoroughly understands the mission.
Results
P
F
________________________________________________________________
III-34
071-SL3-XXX5
3. Positions squad so that interlocking fires and security for crew served.
weapons is achieved for primary, alternate, and supplementary positions.
4. Takes advantage of natural cover and concealment when
assigning positions.
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
a. Selects buildings that offer the best protection.
b. Selects positions the conceal firing signatures.
c. Concentrates anti-armor weapons on the most likely mounted
avenues of approach.
d. Positions M203s to cover dead space for machineguns then
any remaining dead space.
e. Positions SAWs to allow for grazing fire and to cover
dismounted avenues of approach.
5. Ensures that positions provide dispersion and covered routes to
alternate and supplementary positions.
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
Related
FM 7-7J
FM 90-10-1
FM 7-8
________________________________________________________________
III-35
071-SL3-XXX6
CONTROL UNIT MOVEMENT IN AN URBAN ENVIRONMENT
071-SL3-XXX6
CONDITIONS
As a rifle squad leader in urban terrain with the enemy location and strength uncertain. Given
an individual weapon with ammunition and LCE. You are directed to conduct movement. The
squad is equipped with all TO&E equipment authorized in addition to ammunition, grenades,
and pyrotechnics. Both enemy forces and noncombatants could be found in the urban area.
Given specific Rules of Engagements (ROE).
STANDARDS
Plan, prepare, and execute movement of a squad in an urban environment. Communicate the
ROE to all squad members.
available to a squad leader. His squad may have to operate with "no fire" areas.
CAUTION
________________________________________________________________
III-36
071-SL3-XXX6
and abrasions.
a. The destination.
b. The route.
c. Actions to take at the destination.
d. The location and actions of the platoon leader.
e. The movement technique of the platoon.
f. The ROE in effect at the time of the mission.
squad.
3. Organize the squad for initial movement. There are several ways in which the squad can be
organized, METT-T dependent.
a. Consideration should be given to organizing the squad into three elements:
(1) An assault element, to close with and destroy the enemy.
(2) A support element, to suppress and fix the enemy by fire.
(3) A breaching element, to clear or mark a path through enemy obstacles or
to blow holes in walls for the assault element. The breaching element can be a member of a fire
team or an attachment, such as an engineer or tank.
(4) The size and composition of these elements will depend on METT-T. The
method of assigning assault and support elements will enable the squad to react to contact or
________________________________________________________________
III-37
071-SL3-XXX6
other situations with each element having a clear understanding of its roll and actions to take.
b. A common movement formation for the squad for streets and alleys is the file
formation.
(1) When moving down narrow streets, the squad will move on one side of
the street and cover the buildings on the opposite side of the street or with fire teams abreast as
squads do on a wide street. This way each fire team can cover each other’s movement.
(2) Squad members are assigned sectors of responsibility that cover the three
dimensional aspect of urban terrain. For example, the lead soldier may cover the area to the
front. The second man may cover second floor windows and so on.
(3) Take advantage of the available cover and concealment to include
shadows. Smoke should be used to conceal the movement of the squad. Suppressive fires
can also provide assistance.
(4) When moving down wide streets, two squads should move abreast of
each other and cover the buildings on the opposite side of the street from where they are
moving.
NOTE: Unit organization can be changed during the mission.
4. Select a movement technique. Ideally, the squad leader will maneuver his fire teams.
However, there might be times when the best organization would be to break fire teams into
two 2-man buddy teams. Ensure that the movement technique selected is compatible with the
platoon’s. Follow the same rules for selecting a movement technique in an urban environment
as in any other situation. Movement down streets and alleys is similar to movement in hallways
and passageways. The size and length of streets and alleys will determine how the squad
moves. When moving through streets or alleys, select one of the following techniques:
•
Traveling.
•
Traveling overwatch.
•
Bounding overwatch.
NOTE: Streets are danger areas and natural kill zones that should be avoided if possible.
designated route and suspected enemy positions that may need to be suppressed based upon
the ROE.
________________________________________________________________
III-38
071-SL3-XXX6
6. Plan for actions upon contact. Plan active and passive countersniper measures.
7. Plan for contingencies. These can include but are not limited to:
•
Handling noncombatants.
•
Casualty evacuation.
•
A requirement to enter and clear a building.
8. Conduct rehearsals. If time is available, rehearsals for the actions during movement should
be conducted. Consideration should be given to rehearsing contingency missions such as room
clearing.
10. Control movement. Move with the lead fire team, positioning self so as not to interfere
with team members’ line of sight or fields of fire. During movement, report progress to the
platoon leader and any situation that would affect the accomplishment of the mission.
12. Ensure the team locates, marks and bypasses or clears obstacles/booby traps.
13. Ensure three-dimensional and 360-degree security is maintained.
14. Rotate fire teams during movement, if applicable.
15. Ensure the squad uses visual signal techniques until the element of surprise is lost.
Communication between squad members should be rehearsed and understood by all.
________________________________________________________________
III-39
071-SL3-XXX6
16. When moving through a building, conduct movement as in Task 071-SL3-XXX3,
Conduct movement through hallways and subterranean passageways. Breaching may
have to be accomplished in order to take full advantage of the cover and concealment of
buildings.
Tape (ECT) for creating man sized breaches both on the exterior and interior of buildings,
as the Hooligan’s Tool, etc, to remove all glass from windows and create loopholes and
mouseholes.
R-30B, Rifle Launched Entry Munition: Soldiers and leaders should consider the use
of breaching devices such as the rifle launched entry munition to breach holes in walls
helping to create loopholes.
________________________________________________________________
III-40
071-SL3-XXX6
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he will be controlling the movement of a squad in urban
terrain. The enemy strength and location are unknown.
EVALUATION GUIDE
________________________________________________________________
III-41
071-SL3-XXX6
1. Thoroughly understands the mission.
Results
Know—
P
F
a. The destination.
b. The route.
c. Actions to take at the destination.
d. The location and actions of the platoon leader.
e. The movement technique of the platoon.
f. The ROE in effect at the time of the mission.
P
F
4. Selects movement technique.
P
F
P
F
6. Plans for actions upon contact.
P
F
7. Plans for contingencies.
P
F
P
F
11. Ensures the team locates, marks, and/or clears obstacles/booby traps.
P
F
3. Organizes the squad for movement.
P
F
8. Conducts rehearsals if time permits.
P
F
9. If applicable, ensures that the support element is positioned
to provide fire support.
P
F
12. Ensures three-dimensional and 360-degree security is maintained.
P
13. Positions self to control the movement of the fire teams.
P
F
Results
F
________________________________________________________________
III-42
071-SL3-XXX6
14. Rotates fire teams during movement, if applicable.
P
F
15. Ensures the squad members use visual signal techniques
P
F
P
F
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
FM 7-8
Related
FM 90-10-1
________________________________________________________________
III-43
071-SL3-XXX8
CONTROL ACTIONS OF A SQUAD UNDER SNIPER FIRE IN AN
URBAN ENVIRONMENT
071-SL3-XXX8
CONDITIONS
As the leader of a rifle squad operating as part of a platoon in an urban environment with the
enemy location and strength uncertain. Given an individual weapon with ammunition and LCE.
The squad is halted or moving. The squad is equipped with all TO&E equipment authorized.
The squad receives fires from an individual sniper. Friendly units have indirect fire available.
Both enemy forces and noncombatants could be found in the urban area. Given specific Rules
of Engagement (ROE).
STANDARDS
Employ sniper countermeasures. Ensure that the squad returns fire immediately. Locate and
engage the sniper with well-aimed fire. Identify the enemy position to the squad. Direct the
squad to kill, capture, or force the withdrawal of the sniper. Communicate ROE to all squad
members.
NOTE: Urban environments may require precise application of firepower. This is especially
true of an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. The
Rules of engagement (ROE) may prohibit the use of certain weapons until a specific
hostile action takes place. All soldiers must be aware of the ROE. Leaders must
include the precise use of weapons in their planning for missions on urban terrain.
CAUTION
________________________________________________________________
III-44
071-SL3-XXX8
and abrasions.
1. Prior to and during the mission, based on the platoon leader's order, employ countersniper
measures. These measures can be organic or resource intensive. These measures are either
active or passive.
2. During the course of the mission, should contact with a sniper occur, the lead element
reacts to enemy sniper fire by immediately returning fire and taking up the nearest covered
positions.
R-8, Remote Marking Munitions: The M203 TPT round may be used as a remote
marking munition and may be employed to mark known enemy sniper locations for artillery,
direct fire weapons, and armored vehicles.
WARNING
cause injuries.
3. Alert the remainder of the squad to the direction of the sniper, if known.
________________________________________________________________
III-45
071-SL3-XXX8
4. Maintain command and control with team leaders while conducting actions on contact.
Control the unit's actions by:
a. Using standard fire commands to control unit fires.
b. Locating and engaging known or suspected enemy sniper positions with well-aimed
fire.
WARNING
c. Ensuring personnel maintain contact with the personnel on their left and right.
d. Ensuring personnel maintain contact with their team leaders and report the location
of the enemy sniper position.
________________________________________________________________
III-46
071-SL3-XXX8
e. Checking the status of personnel.
f. Communicating all information higher and lower.
g. Maintaining contact with the platoon leader.
5. Move to the team in contact and link up with its leader, if possible.
a. Determine whether or not the squad must move out of the engagement area.
b. Determine whether or not the squad can gain and maintain suppressive fires with the
element already in contact (based on the volume and accuracy of enemy fires against the
element in contact).
c. Develop the situation through fire and/or maneuver. Make an assessment of the
situation by gaining information which:
•
Identifies the location of the enemy sniper position and obstacles.
•
Identifies the vulnerable flanks.
•
Identifies covered and concealed flanking routes to the enemy position.
R-8, Remote Marking Munitions: The M203 TPT round may be used as a remote
marking munition to mark routes, locations and designate targets for artillery, direct fire
weapons, and armored vehicles.
WARNING
cause injuries.
d. Determine the next course of action based upon the platoon leader's intent and
specified and implied tasks.
e. Report the situation to the platoon leader along with his recommendation.
f. Call for and adjust indirect fire as required, if consistent with the ROE.
g. Execute, in conjunction with the remainder of the platoon, actions IAW T&EOs 73/4-1103, Execute Assault; 7-3/4-1402, Breach an Obstacle; 7-3/4-1108, Perform
Overwatch/Support by Fire; 7-3/4-1110, Clear a Building; or 7-3/4-1111, Break Contact.
________________________________________________________________
III-47
071-SL3-XXX8
6. After executing the selected action, the squad continues its original mission.
statement.
Brief Soldier: Using the instructions and information given by the platoon leader, tell the
soldier the route to use; tell him that the movement technique and the actions to be taken will be
given to him.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Employs countersniper measures.
P
F
P
F
2. Ensures the lead element reacts to enemy sniper fire by immediately
returning fire and taking up the nearest covered positions.
P
F
3. Alerts the remainder of the squad to the direction of the
sniper, if known.
4. Maintains command and control with his team leaders by:
P
F
a. Using standard fire commands to control unit fires.
b. Locating and engaging known or suspected enemy sniper
positions with well-aimed fire.
c Ensuring personnel maintain contact with the personnel on
their left and right.
d. Ensuring personnel maintain contact with their team
leaders and report the location of the enemy sniper position.
Results
e. Checking the status of their personnel.
f. Passing all information higher and lower.
g. Maintaining contact with the platoon leader.
________________________________________________________________
III-48
071-SL3-XXX8
5. Moves to the team in contact and link up with its leader.
P
F
6. Determines action(s) to take:
P
F
a. Determines whether or not the squad must move
out of the engagement area.
b. Determines whether or not the squad can gain and maintain
suppressive fires with the element already in contact.
c. Develops the situation through fire and/or maneuver.
Makes an assessment of the situation by gaining information which:
• Identifies the location of the enemy sniper position and
obstacles.
•
Identifies the vulnerable flanks.
• Identifies covered and concealed flanking routes to the
enemy position.
d. Determines the next course of action based upon the platoon
leader's intent and specified and implied tasks.
e. Reports the situation to the platoon leader along with a
recommendation.
f. Calls for and adjusts indirect fire or direct fire from artillery
or from armored vehicles as required.
g. Execute, in conjunction with the remainder of the platoon,
actions IAW Execute Assault, Breach an Obstacle, Perform
Overwatch/Support by Fire, Clear a Building, or Break Contact.
7. After executing the selected action, the squad continues its original
mission.
Results
P
F
FEEDBACK
________________________________________________________________
III-49
071-SL3-XXX8
REFERENCES
Required
FM 7-7J
FM 7-8
Related
FM 90-10-1
________________________________________________________________
III-50
071-SL3-XXX8
________________________________________________________________
III-51
SECTION IV
SKILL LEVEL 4
IV-1
IV-2
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL, 1999
071-SL4-XXX1
CONTROL SUPPORT ELEMENT FOR CLEARING A BUILDING
071-SL4-XXX1
CONDITIONS
As a platoon sergeant of an infantry platoon and directed to control the support element for
overwatch support of the attacking assault force in urbanized terrain with the enemy location
and strength uncertain. Given one or two squads with individual weapons, antiarmor weapons,
crew-served weapons, and support weapons, with ammunition and load-bearing equipment.
Given specific Rules of engagement (ROE).
STANDARDS
Ensure that the supporting element isolates the objective and suppresses all enemy fires.
Prevents enemy reinforcements from entering building. Provide replacements for the assault
force as needed. Cause no friendly casualties. All personnel are briefed on the ROE.
NOTE: The following assumes that only the company's organic weapons support the Infantry
platoon. Urban combat situations may require precise application of firepower.
This is especially true of an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with
noncombatants. The presence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the
combat power available to a platoon. The platoon may have to operate with "no
fire" areas. Rules of engagement (ROE) can prohibit the use of certain weapons until
a specific hostile action takes place. All soldiers must be aware of the ROE.
Leaders must include the precise use of weapons in their planning for missions in
urban terrain.
CAUTION__________________________________________
__
soldiers.
________________________________________________________________
IV-3
071-SL4-XXX1
abrasions.
1. Receive the order and conduct troop-leading procedures for controlling the support
element.
2. Reconnoiter the tentative support position and the routes to it. Ensure that the objective
can be isolated from the support position and that it overwatches the assault element. Ensure
that fires from the position will not be masked by the assault element.
3. Move the support element by a covered and concealed route to the support position.
4. Supervise the occupation and preparation of the support position.
a. Ensure local security is established to cover the flanks and rear.
b. Assign covered and concealed positions, sectors of fire, and other fire control
measures (TRP, FPL, PDF).
R-8, Remote Marking Munitions: Consideration should be given to the employment
of the M203 TPT round as a remote marking munition to facilitate fire control and
distribution.
WARNING
cause injuries.
________________________________________________________________
IV-4
071-SL4-XXX1
•
To leaders so that each element leader can designate individual positions and
sectors of fire.
•
To all crew-served weapons.
5. Overwatch the assault element's movement.
a. Maintain continuous communications with and observation of the assault element,
its route, and any terrain that can influence the route.
b. Alert the assault element of any detected enemy or threats.
6. Direct the suppression of the objective with indirect and/or direct fire, ROE permitting.
a. Engage or report targets IAW the SOP or OPORD. The SOP should specify
priority of weapons employment (M203, M16, M249, and M60) for different conditions (day
or night).
b. Fire only in assigned sectors of fire unless ordered by the platoon leader to do
otherwise. Under very restrictive ROE fire only at actual enemy locations.
7. Ensure the squad/team leaders control fires onto the objective using tracer, voice
commands, whistle, and visual signals.
a. Ensure M60s/M249s work together; reloading and firing is staggered so that there
are no lulls in firing.
b. Direct concentrated fires against identified weapon positions.
________________________________________________________________
IV-5
071-SL4-XXX1
c. Move individuals and weapons where they can be most effective as the situation
changes.
d. Hold fires when no individual positions have been identified to conserve ammunition
until a target is observed.
e. Reduce the volume of fire when enemy fires become ineffective.
8. Ensure the support element lifts or shifts fire on signal.
a. Lift fires but continue to observe the assigned sector and be prepared to engage any
threat to the movement element.
b. Shift fires to another target.
9. Order the support element to cease-fire. Order the cease-fire after the movement element
is on the objective or when all enemies are destroyed or withdrawn from the engagement area.
10. Support the assault element by (as necessary):
a. Breaching walls en route to and in the objective structure.
b. Providing security to cleared portions of the building.
c. Providing reinforcements to the assault element as necessary.
d. Providing resupply of ammunition and explosives.
e. Evacuating casualties, noncombatants, and prisoners.
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he will be controlling the support element overwatching the
assault element. The enemy strength and location are unknown.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
________________________________________________________________
IV-6
071-SL4-XXX1
1. Conducts troop-leading procedures.
P
F
2. Reconnoiters the support position and the routes to it.
P
F
P
F
P
F
3. Selects positions that isolate the objective
P
F
4. Moves the element by a covered and concealed route to the support position.
5. Supervises the occupation and preparation of the support position.
P
F
P
F
a. Establishes security to the flanks and rear.
b. Assigns covered and concealed positions, sectors of fire, and
other fire control measures:
6. Ensure the support element overwatches the assault element's movement.
a. Maintains continuous communications with and observation
of the assault element, its route, and any terrain that can influence the route.
b. Alerts the assault element and platoon leader of any detected enemy.
7. Directs the suppression of the objective with indirect and/or direct fire.
8. Ensure the squad/team leaders control fires onto the objective using
tracer, voice commands, whistle, and visual cards.
Results
P
F
9. Support element lifts or shifts fire on signal.
P
F
10. Orders the support element to cease-fire.
P
F
a. Reduces the volume of fire when enemy fires become ineffective.
b. Holds fires when no individual positions have been identified to
conserve ammunition until a target is observed.
11. Supports the assault element by (as necessary):
P
F
a. Breaching walls en route to and in the objective structure.
________________________________________________________________
IV-7
071-SL4-XXX1
b. Providing security to cleared portions of the building.
c. Providing reinforcements to the assault element as necessary.
d. Providing resupply of ammunition and explosives.
e. Evacuating casualties, noncombatants, and prisoners.
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
FM 7-7J
FM 7-8
Related
FM 90-10-1
________________________________________________________________
IV-8
SECTION V
MQS TASKS
V-1
V-2
04-3312.02-0011
STP 7-11II-MQS
CONDUCT CLEARING OF A BUILDING
04-3312.02-0011
CONDITIONS
The platoon is operating as part of a company in an urban environment. The platoon is
required to clear a building. The platoon is equipped with all TO&E authorized in addition to
ammunition and other equipment necessary for clearing a building. Both friendly and enemy
forces may have artillery fire and CAS available under high intensity conditions. In conditions
requiring precision techniques, only the company’s organic weapons support the Infantry
platoon. Some iterations should be performed in MOPP4. Civilians, government
organizations, nongovernmental organizations, private organizations, and the international
press may be present on the battlefield. Urban environments may require precise application of
firepower. This is especially true of an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with
noncombatants. The presence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat
power available to a platoon leader. His platoon may have to operate with “no fire” areas.
There are specific Rules of Engagement (ROE) that match the conditions (high intensity or
precision). ROE may prohibit the use of certain weapons until a specific hostile action takes
place.
STANDARDS
Conduct clearing a building so that the unit kills, captures, or forces the withdrawal of all
enemy in the building and repels any enemy counterattack. Conduct rehearsals. The US
forces comply with the ROE. All soldiers must be aware of the ROE. Leaders must include
the precise use of weapons in the planning for missions requiring precision techniques.
Collateral damage is limited. The platoon suffers no casualties due to friendly fire.
________________________________________________________________
CAUTION__________________________________________V-3
__
soldiers.
STP 7-11II-MQS
04-3312.02-0011
abrasions.
PERFORMANCE MEASURES
1. Organize the unit into a support element and an assault element.
a. Organize the assault element into room clearing teams, consisting of two to four
soldiers (a fire team maximum). The exact number of clearing teams and the size of the teams
is based on the METT-T factors available.
b. Ensure that the assault team carries as much ammunition as possible, especially
extra grenades.
c. Move with the assault element to maintain command and control.
________________________________________________________________
V-4
04-3312.02-0011
STP 7-11II-MQS
2. Provide fire support for the assault force with the support element. (Vehicles and M60 and
M249 machine guns are normally positioned with the support element.)
a. Assign each soldier in the support element and key weapons a target or area to
cover.
remote marking munition to facilitate fire control and distribution.
WARNING
cause injuries.
b. Suppress or impair enemy gunners within the objective building and adjacent
buildings. Under precision conditions, the support element will only fire at known enemy
locations.
c. Ensure that the objective building is isolated with direct and indirect fire to prevent
enemy withdrawal, reinforcement, or counterattack.
d. Use direct fire weapons to destroy enemy positions.
3. Minimize enemy defensive fire during movement to the objective with fire from the assault
element. The level of suppressive fires will be determined by the conditions.
a. Use covered and concealed routes (to include rooftops); exploit limited visibility
conditions, whenever possible.
________________________________________________________________
V-5
STP 7-11II-MQS
04-3312.02-0011
R-28, Get on Top of Building: Soldiers should consider the use of devices that allow
them to assault the top of buildings without climbing an interior stairwell.
b. Conduct movement only after enemy defensive fire is suppressed or obscured.
c. Move along routes that do not mask friendly suppressive fire.
d. Cross open areas rapidly under the concealment of smoke and the suppression of
enemy targets provided by the support force.
4. Direct the assault on the objective building.
a. Have the assault element enter the building at the highest level possible.
b. Have the assault element enter the first floor only when forced to do so, ensuring
that it does the following:
(1) Approaches from enemy flank or rear.
(2) Creates a breach of a building.
Tape (ECT) for creating man sized breaches both on the exterior and interior of buildings
________________________________________________________________
V-6
04-3312.02-0011
STP 7-11II-MQS
(3) Throws “cooked off” grenade through the doors or windows and the
breach point if ROE allow.
c. If ROE allow, have the support element increase the rate of fire just before the
assault element enters the objective building and until masked by the assault element.
d. Have the support element shift supporting fires to the objective’s upper windows,
and then to adjacent buildings as the assault element enters the building from ground level. (Shift
to lower windows when entering through an upper story.)
e. Have the assault element secure the entry point and cover staircases and other
routes leading to upper and lower stories as the first priority.
f. Have the assault element clear the rooms that overlook approaches to the building
first.
5. Direct the clearing of each room in the objective building. The room clearing teams should
conduct the following:
a. Position team members on one or both sides of the entry point into the room.
b. “Cook off” and throw a grenade of an appropriate type into the room if ROE allow.
c. Enter the room after the grenade detonates. The clearing team moves through the
entry point quickly and takes up positions inside the room that allow the team to completely
dominate the room and eliminate the threat.
d. Mark the cleared rooms in accordance with the unit SOP.
e. Consolidate and reorganize the teams and continue the attack.
f. Position teams to secure entry points, hallways, stairs, and cleared rooms from
enemy infiltration.
________________________________________________________________
V-7
STP 7-11II-MQS
04-3312.02-0011
6. Consolidate and reorganize the assault and support elements in the cleared building to repel
any enemy counterattack.
a. Position soldiers to cover enemy routes of counterattack and infiltration into the
building.
b. Establish hasty defensive positions, if required.
c. Redistribute ammunition and request resupply, as required.
d. Mark the building to show that it has been cleared (Also mark entry points in
accordance with the unit SOP.)
e. Ensure casualties are treated and evacuated.
f. Ensure prisoners and noncombatants are processed, as required.
R-35, Personnel Restraints: Soldiers can carry and use small and easily portable (in a
pocket) restraint devices, to control civilian detainees or captured military personnel.
g. Continue the mission.
REFERENCES
ARTEP 7-8-MTP
FM 7-7J
FM 7-8
FM 90-10-1
________________________________________________________________
V-8
04-3312.02-0012
STP 7-11II-MQS
CONDUCT DEFENSE IN A BUILT-UP AREA
04-3312.02-0012
CONDITIONS
The platoon is operating as part of a company in an urban environment. The platoon is ordered
to occupy a defensive position. The platoon is equipped with all TO&E equipment authorized
in addition to ammunition, grenades and other equipment necessary for defense in a build-up
area. Both friendly and enemy forces may have artillery fire and CAS available. Some
iterations should be performed in MOPP 4. Civilians, government organizations,
nongovernment organizations, private organizations, and the international press may be present
on the battlefield. There are specific Rules of Engagements (ROE). Defensive operations are
normally conducted under high intensity conditions.
STANDARDS
Complete all specified defensive positions not later than the time specified in the order. Do not
be surprised by the enemy. Accomplish the assigned task. Destroy, block, or delay an
enemy attack, or deny enemy penetration of a specified boundary or terrain. The platoon
conducts rehearsals. The US forces comply with the ROE. All soldiers must be aware of the
ROE. Collateral damage is limited. The platoon suffers no casualties due to friendly fire.
Noncombatants must be evacuated from the defensive position and fields of fire.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows
and knees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged
to wear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTION_________________________________________
___
soldiers.
________________________________________________________________
V-9
STP 7-11II-MQS
04-3312.02-0012
abrasions.
1. Prepare for the occupation of a defensive position.
a. Develop a tentative plan.
b. Conduct a reconnaissance of the position with the squad leaders, radiotelephone
operator, FO, and security element.
c. Assign squad sectors and OP locations, and position key weapons.
WARNING
cause injuries
d. Consider the following points when selecting buildings for defense.
(1) Protection. Type of buildings, concrete or brick (avoid wooden buildings
when possible).
(2) Dispersion. If possible, use two or three buildings for added mutual
support.
(3) Concealment. Avoid obvious positions.
(4) Fields of fire. Positions should have goods fields of fire in all directions.
(5) Observation. The position(s) should permit observation into the adjoining
defensive positions.
________________________________________________________________
V-10
04-3312.02-0012
STP 7-11II-MQS
(6) Covered routes. The best covered routes are through or behind a building
(for movement of troops and resupply).
(7) Fire hazard. Avoid buildings that burn easily.
(8) Time. When time is short, do not use buildings that need a lot of
preparation.
2. Set up platoon security.
a. Emplace a least one OP with communications to the platoon CP.
b. Emplace the platoon early warning system or warning devices before dark or other
limited visibility.
R-5, Intelligence Collection/Dissemination: Leaders should consider the use of an
Unmanned Arial Vehicle (UAV) or an Unmanned Ground Vehicle (UGV) for
reconnaissance and intelligence of a given area.
c. Set up the chemical alarm system for monitoring.
d. Establish security patrols to provide early warning in the areas that cannot be
covered by observation.
3. Evacuate noncombatants from the defensive position and from potential fields of fire.
________________________________________________________________
V-11
STP 7-11II-MQS
04-3312.02-0012
pocket) restraint devices, to control civilian detainees or captured military personnel.
4. Position crew-served and antitank weapons.
a. Have the M60 and M249 machine guns cover dismounted avenues of approach (if
ground rubble obstructs grazing fires, M60s and M249s are placed in the upper stories of
buildings).
b. Have the antiarmor weapons cover armored avenues of approach. Position
weapons inside buildings with adequate space and ventilation for backblast (on upper floors, if
possible, for long-range top shots).
c. To fire antiarmor weapons from inside a building, the following conditions must be
met:
(1) The building must be of sturdy construction.
(2) The ceiling must be at least 7 feet high.
(3) The floor size must be at least 17 by 24 feet for a TOW and Dragon and
AT-4 and 15 by 12 feet for a M72A2/A3 LAW Backblast.
(4) There must be at least 20 square feet of ventilation (room openings) to the
rear of the weapon. An open 7-by-3-foot door provides adequate ventilation.
(5) Remove all glass within the room, furniture, and any remaining loose
objects.
and abrasions.
(6) All soldiers within the room must be forward of the rear of the weapon.
(7) All soldiers in the room must protect their ears when the weapon is fired,
especially the gunner or weapons crew.
d. Ensure that the weapons are mutually supporting and are tied in with adjacent
squads.
5. Establish fighting positions.
________________________________________________________________
V-12
04-3312.02-0012
STP 7-11II-MQS
a. Place the platoon CP in a covered and concealed position.
b. Have the squad leaders occupy positions with their squads.
c. Assign each member a position with primary, alternate, and secondary sectors of
fire.
WARNING
cause injuries
d. Assign hasty firing positions.
e. Ensure that the squads improve positions as time permits, to include:
(1) Sandbags for overhead and all-round protection.
(2) Wire mesh over windows (open at the bottom to allow grenades to be
dropped out) (leave curtains over windows for added camouflage).
(3) Fire prevention measures.
(4) Wet blankets around weapons positions to keep down dust when firing to
keep from giving positions away.
(5) Reinforcement of walls, ceilings, and flooring.
(6) Preparation of loopholes (ensure some dummy loopholes are made to help
camouflage original positions).
(7) Inspection of positions from outside.
6. Coordinate with adjacent units.
a. Establish responsibility for overlapping enemy avenues of approach between
adjacent squads and platoons.
________________________________________________________________
V-13
STP 7-11II-MQS
04-3312.02-0012
b. Exchange information on OP locations, unit signals, and passage points.
7. Establish wire communications if assets are available.
a. Lay wire between the platoon CP and the squads (run wire between rooms and use
existing building wire and antenna to camouflage wire run between buildings and platoon radio
antenna).
b. Employ switchboards or hot loops as appropriate.
8. Construct barriers and obstacles.
a. Integrate barriers and/or obstacles with the platoon’s key weapons.
b. Cover all obstacles and barriers by observation and fire (both direct and indirect) as
well as mines.
9. Develop an indirect fire plan. The platoon leader and FO plan and coordinate indirect fires
to support the platoon defense on likely avenues of approach, to cover obstacles, and to
support counterattacks.
10. Designate alternate and supplementary positions.
a. Ensure that each soldier and key weapon has an alternate and supplementary
position.
b. Designate and, when appropriate, mark routes between primary, alternate, and
supplementary positions.
11. Improve movement routes between positions. Ensure that squad leaders:
a. Improve movement between positions by such measures as digging trenches, using
sewers and tunnels, creating mouseholes, and emplacing ropes for climbing and rappelling.
b. Mark routes between positions.
c. Rehearse routes so all platoon members can use them day or night.
12. Develop and rehearse the platoon counterattack plan.
a. Make sure that the counterattack force is allocated demolitions, antiarmor assets,
and extra grenades.
b. Designate and, if appropriate, mark routes for the counterattack.
________________________________________________________________
V-14
04-3312.02-0012
STP 7-11II-MQS
c. Make sure that the counterattack plan is rehearsed during the day and at night.
13. Prepare and rehearse the withdrawal plan.
a. Designate and, if appropriate, mark the withdrawal plan.
b. Have the leaders plan and disseminate primary and alternate withdrawal signals.
c. Make sure the withdrawal plan is rehearsed during the day and at night.
REFERENCES
ARTEP 7-8-MTP
FM 7-8
FM 7-7J
FM 90-10-1
________________________________________________________________
V-15
STP 7-11II-MQS
04-3312.02-XXX1
MAINTAIN COMMUNICATIONS IN AN URBAN ENVIRONMENT
04-3312.02-XXX1
CONDITIONS
The platoon is operating as part of a larger force in an urban environment and is either stationary
or moving. The platoon is equipped with all TO&E equipment authorized.
STANDARDS
The platoon maintains internal and external communications throughout the conduct of
operations.
1. Determine the methods necessary for maintaining communications. Communications
equipment may not function properly because of the massive construction of buildings and the
environment. Noise of built-up area combat is much louder than in other areas, making sound
signals difficult to hear. Therefore, the time needed to establish an effective communications
system might be greater than in more conventional terrain. Consider these effects when
allocating time to establish communications.
2. Consider the following when using FM communications:
a. Site selection. The site selected ensures communications with all stations. Attempt
to select a site that allows line of sight. Buildings located between radio stations, particularly
steel and reinforced concrete structures hinder transmission and reception. Do not select an
antenna position in a tunnel or beneath an underpass or steel bridge, because of the high
absorption of the RF energy.
________________________________________________________________
V-16
04-3312.02-XXX1
STP 7-11II-MQS
b. Extending communication range in urban terrain. Attempt to emplace radios and
retransmission sites on the upper floors of a building. Open doors and windows to enhance the
flow of FM signals. Construct field expedient antennas to enhance capabilities. Use windows
and holes in walls to extend antennas for better communications.
c. Camouflage. Radio antennas can be concealed by placing them among civilian
television antennas, along the sides of chimneys and steeples, or out windows that direct FM
communications away from enemy early-warning sources and ground observation. It is
important that the antennas not touch the camouflage, as this will degrade the communications.
3. Consider the use of telephones and landlines:
a. Use existing telephone systems. Telephones are not always secure even though
many telephone cables are underground.
b. Wire laid at street level is easily damaged by rubble and vehicle traffic. If possible,
lay wire through buildings, underground systems, or buried in shallow trenches for maximum
protection.
c. Telephone lines laid in buildings should be laid through walls and floors.
d. During subterranean operations, wire may become the primary means of
communication due to the restrictive terrain.
4. Consider the use of visual and pyrotechnic signals.
a. One of the greatest barriers to coordination and command and control in urban
combat is the intense noise. Verbal commands should be backed up by simple, nonverbal
signals.
b. Line of sight can be a barrier to visual and pyrotechnic signals in an urban
environment. Rubble, debris, smoke, fire, and the buildings themselves can make these
difficult.
5. Consider the use of messengers. They are the most secure means of communications. As
in any environment, no lone soldier should be used. As a minimum, two soldiers should be
tasked to serve as messengers, for security.
REFERENCES
ARTEP 7-8-MTP
FM 7-7J
FM 7-8
FM 90-10-1
________________________________________________________________
V-17
STP 7-11II-MQS
04-3312.02-XXX1
________________________________________________________________
V-18
04-3312.02-XXX2
STP 7-11II-MQS
CONDUCT SUBTERRANEAN OPERATIONS IN AN URBAN
ENVIRONMENT
04-3312.02-XXX2
CONDITIONS
The platoon is operating as part of a company in an urban environment. The platoon is given
the mission of conducting subterranean operations. The platoon is equipped with all TO&E
equipment authorized. Both friendly and enemy forces may have artillery and CAS available.
In conditions requiring precision techniques, only the company's organic weapons support the
infantry platoon. Some iteration should be performed in MOPP 4. Civilians, government
organizations, nongovernment organizations, private organizations, and the international press
may be present on the battlefield. Urban environments require precise application of firepower.
This is especially true of an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants.
The presence of civilians can restrict the use of direct and indirect fires and reduce the combat
power available to a platoon leader. His platoon may have to operate with "no fire" areas.
There are specific Rules of Engagement (ROE) that match the conditions (high intensity or
precision). ROE can prohibit the use of certain weapons until a specific hostile action takes
place.
STANDARDS
The platoon moves through a subterranean avenue of approach at the time specified in the
order. The platoon kills, captures, or forces the withdrawal of all enemy forces along the
underground avenue of approach. The US forces comply with the ROE. All soldiers must be
aware of the ROE. Leaders must include the precise use of weapons in their planning for
missions requiring precision techniques. Collateral damage is limited. The platoon suffers no
casualties due to friendly fire.
________________________________________________________________
V-19
STP 7-11II-MQS
04-3312.02-XXX2
CAUTION__________________________________________
__
soldiers.
abrasions.
1. Receive the order and develop a plan IAW T&EO 7-3/4-1605, Develop and
Communicate a Plan, and MQS task 04-3303.02-0014, Prepare Platoon or Company
Combat Orders, to include:
a. Organize the platoon for the mission.
b. Determine the route, if not provided (Consider the technique of attempting to
maneuver elements above ground to secure entry points while one unit is moving through the
underground passageway). This technique gives the platoon the advantage of security on
lateral routes into the passageway and provides security to the underground element.
R-5B, Intelligence Collection/Dissemination: Leaders should consider the use of a
Unmanned Ground Vehicle (UGV) for reconnaissance of the inside of subterranean areas.
This will allow reconnaissance of the objective area without the enemy learning the strength,
location, or intentions of the main element.
c. Determine the soldier's load and any special equipment needed for the mission.
d. Establish control measures and communications necessary (e.g., landlines trailed
behind lead elements).
________________________________________________________________
V-20
04-3312.02-XXX2
STP 7-11II-MQS
e. Plan for actions on enemy contact along the route.
f. Plan for the evacuation of any casualties.
g. Give specific tasks such as: task the squads that will enter first task the remainder
of the platoon to provide security of the entrance location until their time to move into and
through the underground passageway.
2. Direct all leaders to prepare the platoon for the mission IAW T&EO 7-3/4-1606, Prepare
for Combat.
3. Moves the platoon to the entrance of the subterranean passageway: a manhole cover,
subway entrance, etc.
4. Once the area is secured, direct the lead squad to (remove the cover and) enter and
conduct the mission.
5. Depending on the size of the subterranean passageway move with the lead squad during the
movement through the passageway. Alternately, track the underground elements by moving
along with them above ground.
6. Maintain communications with the company commander as well as subunits during the
conduct of the mission.
7. Ensure prisoners and noncombatants are processed, as required.
pocket) restraint devices to control civilian detainees or captured military personnel.
________________________________________________________________
V-21
STP 7-11II-MQS
04-3312.02-XXX2
REFERENCES
ARTEP 7-8-MTP
FM 7-7J
FM 7-8
FM 90-10-1
________________________________________________________________
V-22
04-3312.02-XXX3
STP 7-11II-MQS
CONTROL ACTIONS OF A PLATOON UNDER SNIPER FIRE IN
AN URBAN ENVIRONMENT
04-3312.02-XXX3
CONDITIONS
The platoon is operating as part of a company in an urban environment. The platoon is
equipped with all TO&E equipment authorized. The platoon is halted or moving. The platoon
receives fires from an individual sniper. Both friendly and enemy units may have artillery
available. In conditions requiring precision techniques, only the company's organic weapons
support the infantry platoon. Some iteration should be performed in MOPP4. Civilians,
government organizations, nongovernment organizations, private organizations, and the
international press may be present on the battlefield. There are specific Rules of Engagement
(ROE) that match the conditions (high intensity or precision).
STANDARDS
The platoon returns fire immediately. The platoon locates and engages the enemy with wellaimed fire. Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especially
true of an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. The presence of
civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat power available to a platoon leader.
A platoon may have to operate with "no fire" areas. The platoon identifies the enemy position,
kills, captures, or forces the withdrawal of the sniper. The platoon continues follow-on
operations. The US forces comply with the ROE. ROE can prohibit the use of certain
weapons until a specific hostile action takes place. All leaders must be aware of the ROE.
They must include the precise use of weapons in their planning for MOUT missions. Collateral
damage is limited. The platoon suffers no casualties from friendly fire.
________________________________________________________________
V-23
CAUTION__________________________________________
__
soldiers.
STP 7-11II-MQS
04-3312.02-XXX3
abrasions.
1. Prior to the start of the mission, direct and supervise active and passive sniper
countermeasures. These countermeasures can be performed with or without assistance.
Analyze each measure and select them depending on the METT-T conditions under which the
platoon is operating. Conduct additional training on countermeasures that are not routine.
a. Active sniper countermeasures include:
R-5, Intelligence Collection/Dissemination: Leaders should consider the use of
Unmanned Arial Vehicle (UAV) or Unmanned Ground Vehicle (UGV) for reconnaissance
and intelligence of a given area.
(1) Observation posts and aerial observers. Observers can maintain constant
surveillance over potential sniper positions and detect snipers as they attempt to move into a
position for a shot.
(2) Patrols. Constant reconnaissance and security patrols around a unit's
position hinder a sniper's getting into a firing position undetected. Small patrols are the most
effective.
(3) US Snipers. US snipers can be most effective as a counter to enemy
snipers. Not only do they have an expert knowledge of sniping and likely enemy hiding places,
they can normally engage enemy marksmen and irregulars at a greater range than the enemy
sniper can engage US forces.
(4) Unit Weapons. If an enemy sniper engages a unit, it may be authorized
by the ROE to respond with fire from all its light weapons. In an urban area, the direction of
enemy fire, especially of a single rifle shot, is often difficult to determine. If a unit can
determine the general location of a sniper, it should return suppressive fire while maneuvering a
subunit to engage the sniper from close range.
________________________________________________________________
V-24
04-3312.02-XXX3
STP 7-11II-MQS
R-8, Remote Marking Munition: Consideration should be given to the employment of
the M203 TPT round as a remote-marking munition to mark the location of a sniper for fire
from armored vehicles and for direct fire artillery.
WARNING
cause injuries.
(5) The use of overmatching return fires (i.e., 25mm on the BFV, .50 cal
MG, TOW, Hellfire, Dragon, Javelin, and even the 120mm main gun of an M1 MBT).
(6) Lasers. The use of lasers to detect and counter enemy snipers is a new
application for this technology. Laser range finders and target designators are effective against
who may look in their general direction, regardless of whether a telescope is being employed.
Any enemy sniper looking through a telescope or binoculars, or one scanning a US position at
night, is more vulnerable to laser destruction. Although laser devices do not damage buildings
or penetrate rooms, care must be taken at close ranges to avoid unnecessary civilian casualties
from their use in built-up areas.
(7) Pre-emptive Fires. In mid- to high-intensity urban combat, pre-emptive
fires can often be used against likely sniper positions. This technique is more often used during
offensive operations. It uses large amounts of ammunition but can be very effective for short
attacks. Fragmentation fires from artillery, mortars, and grenade launchers are best for
suppressing snipers whose position has not yet been detected.
(8) Projected smoke. Projected smoke that builds quickly is a good
response to protect a unit from further casualties if engaged by an enemy sniper.
(9) Helicopter-carried countersniper teams. Not only can helicopters provide
aerial observation and fires or insert additional combat patrols and reaction forces, they can also
carry countersniper teams that can engage identified enemy snipers from the air.
b. Passive countermeasures include:
(1) Limit Exposure. Basic situation awareness while in an urban environment
must be adhered to. Avoid gathering together in large groups in the open. Remain dispersed.
Avoid wearing obvious badges of rank. Avoid exaggerated saluting or standing at attention
for officers while in the open. If troops are riding in the cargo area of trucks, keep the canvas
cargo cover mounted to screen them (this countermeasure may not be appropriate if there is
threat of ambush by enemy forces in addition to snipers).
________________________________________________________________
V-25
STP 7-11II-MQS
04-3312.02-XXX3
(2) Wear Protective Equipment. The kevlar helmet and the protective vest
will not always stop a sniper bullet, but in many cases they will significantly reduce the severity
of wounds. Soldiers must wear them at any time they are exposed to potential sniper fire. In
situations where dismounted movement across country is not required, request and issue
soldiers special, heavy protective vests that are actually bulletproof. All members of units
assigned to static positions, such as roadblocks and observation posts, should wear this
additional protection.
(3) Use Armored Vehicles. Whenever possible, move around the urban area
in a protected vehicle with as little exposure as possible.
(4) Erect Screens and Shields. Use simple canvas or plastic screens to make
a dangerous alleyway or street crossing much safer for foot traffic. Adapt screens on windows
to allow vision out while hiding personnel inside. Use moveable concrete barriers to provide
protection for personnel at static positions. Use common items, such as rubble-filled 55-gallon
drums and sandbags, to provide cover where none exists naturally.
(5) Deny the enemy use of overwatching terrain. Either occupy such terrain
with friendly forces or modify it to make it less useful to an enemy sniper.
(6) Use smoke haze or smoke screens to obscure the sniper's field of view
and limit the effectiveness of his fires. A clear atmosphere is required for accurate long-range
sniping. Smoke haze can be maintained over broad areas for long periods without significantly
hindering friendly operations. Smoke screens can be created quickly and sustained for short
periods, often long enough for US forces to accomplish a short-term objective free of sniper
fires.
2. During the course of the mission, should contact with a sniper occur, the lead element
reacts to enemy sniper fire by:
a. Immediately returning fire and taking up the nearest covered positions.
b. Alerting the remainder of the platoon to the direction of the sniper, if known.
R-8, Remote Marking Munition: Consideration should be given to using the M203
TPT round as a remote marking munitions to mark the known and/or suspected enemy
sniper location so that direct fire artillery, armored vehicles, or aircraft may fire on the
sniper.
WARNING
cause injuries.
________________________________________________________________
V-26
04-3312.02-XXX3
STP 7-11II-MQS
3. Maintain command and control with squad leaders, conducting actions on contact.
The squad leaders control their unit's actions. They:
a. Use standard fire commands to control their unit's fires.
b. Locate and engage known or suspected enemy sniper positions with well-aimed
fire.
c. Ensure personnel maintain contact with the personnel on their left and right.
d. Ensure personnel maintain contact with their team leaders and report the location of
the enemy sniper position.
e. Check the status of their personnel.
f. Pass on all information.
g. Maintain contact.
4. Move to the squad in contact and link up with its leader.
a. Determine whether or not the platoon must move out of the engagement area.
b. Determine whether or not suppressive fires can be obtained and maintained with the
element already in contact (based on the volume and accuracy of enemy fires against the
element in contact).
c. Develop the situation through fire and/or maneuver. Make an assessment of the
________________________________________________________________
V-27
STP 7-11II-MQS
04-3312.02-XXX3
situation by gaining information which:
(1) Identifies the location of the enemy sniper position and obstacles.
(2) Identifies the vulnerable flanks.
(3) Identifies covered and concealed flanking routes to the enemy position.
d. Determine the next course of action based upon the commander's intent and
specified and implied tasks.
e. Report the situation to the company commander along with a recommendation.
f. Call for and adjust fire from artillery (direct or indirect), armored vehicles, or
aircraft, as required.
g. Execute actions IAW T&EOs 7-3/4-1103, Execute Assault; 7-3/4-1402, Breach
an Obstacle; 7-3/4-1108, Perform Overwatch/Support by Fire; 7-3/4-1110, Clear a
Building; or 7-3/4-1111, Break Contact.
5. After executing the selected action, the platoon continues its original mission.
REFERENCES
ARTEP 7-8-MTP
FM 7-7J
FM 7-8
FM 90-10-1
________________________________________________________________
V-28
04-3312.02-XXX3
STP 7-11II-MQS
________________________________________________________________
V-29
SECTION VI
EXPERIMENTAL
TASKS
VI-1
VI-2
113-SL1-XX10E
PREPARE A MOTOROLA TALKABOUT FOR OPERATIONS IN
URBAN TERRAIN
113-SL1-XX10E
CONDITIONS
Given a NLOS portable radio with UHF capability, radio accessories, a Ni-Cad battery and
6-AAA Alkaline batteries, and an operating instruction manual.
STANDARDS
Prepare the radio to operate.
TRAINING EVALUATION
1. Assemble the components and accessories of the Portable Radio and inspect the
TalkAbout radio and components for damage, such as dents, and cracks. Complete radio
components are:
a. Radio
b. Antenna
c. Belt Clip
d. Ni-Cad Battery Pack
e. 10 Hour Charger Adapter
f. Ni-Cad Battery Tray
g. Alkaline Battery Tray
________________________________________________________________
VI-3
113-SL1-XX10E
FIGURE NOT AVAILABLE
Figure 1. TalkAbout distance radio.
1. Radio characteristics.
Description
Channels
Codes
Operating Frequency
Talk Range
Power Source
Battery Life
Specifications
10
38
UHF-462.5625 to 462.7125 MHz
Up to 5-Miles
6-AA Alkaline batteries or 1-Ni-Cad battery Pack
25-Hours Alkaline Batteries, 8-Hours Ni-Cad Battery
(5/5/90 duty cycle)
Table 1. Radio specifications.
2. Install the battery pack by:
NOTES: 1. The NI-Cad battery pack is shipped uncharged, it must be fully charged for
16-hours before use (first charge only). It is recommended that only Motorola
batteries and chargers be used with this radio.
2...The NI-Cad rechargeable battery pack will provide approximately 8-hours of
operation with normal use (5% sending messages, 5% receiving messages and
90% in standby mode).
3. The radio must be OFF before installing/removing the battery.
a. Install the Ni-Cad battery pack.
(1) Push back both battery cover latches until you see the orange tabs.
(2) Slide battery the cover down and lift to remove (Figure 2D).
________________________________________________________________
VI-4
113-SL1-XX10E
(3) Insert the battery pack with the arrows pointing towards the top of the
radio (Figure 2E).
(4) Replace the battery cover and lock the latches.
(5) To remove the battery, remove cover, turn the radio over and tap the
battery end of the radio against the palm of your hand. The battery will drop in your hand
(Figure 2F).
Figure 1. Remove battery cover, install battery, replace cover.
NOTE: DO NOT remove the plastic wrap from the battery pack. This will permanently
damage the battery.
b. To charge the NI-Cad battery.
•
Turn the radio OFF when charging. The radio will require twice as much time to
charge when left on.
•
Lift accessory cover and plug in Charger Adapter.
•
Plug the charger into an electric outlet. The light on the charger will glow
continuously if charging properly.
________________________________________________________________
VI-5
•
113-SL1-XX10E
Allow 10-hours for the battery to fully charge. DO NOT leave the battery on
charge for prolonged periods after the battery has reached full charge.
b. Installing the Alkaline batteries for DPS Model:
NOTE: The TalkAbout Distance DPS has the option of operating with either a NI-Cad
battery pack or 6-AA alkaline batteries. Alkaline batteries will last about 25-hours
with normal use. That’s approximately 5% sending messages, 5% receiving and
90% in standby mode.
(1) Unlock battery cover latches and remove battery cover and the Ni-Cad
battery pack.
(2) Remove Ni-cad tray by squeezing the latch on the bottom of the tray and
lift it out (Figure 3G.
(3) Insert 6 AA batteries into the battery tray, ensure the batteries are facing
toward the positive and negative ends that is indicated on the battery tray.
(4) Align the tabs on the top and sides of the alkaline battery tray with the slots
in the radio. Contacts on the battery tray should match the contacts on the radio (Figure 3H).
(5) Press the bottom of the tray into the radio.
(6) To remove the Alkaline battery tray use the reverse order of installation.
Figure 3. Installing alkaline batteries for DPS model.
c. Low battery alert.
(1) When the battery is low, the radio will beep:
•
3 to 4 seconds after turning power on
•
Every 10-minutes in standby mode
________________________________________________________________
VI-6
113-SL1-XX10E
•
After release of the push-to-talk button
(2) Recharge the NI-Cad battery pack immediately or, replace the 6AA
batteries to avoid interrupted use.
NOTE: Remove battery pack before storing your radio for extended periods. Batteries may
corrode over time if left in radio and can cause permanent damage to your radio.
4. To attach and remove the antenna: To attach the antenna, rotate the antenna clockwise
onto the top of the radio until hand tight. Reverse to remove (Figure 4A).
NOTE: The antenna should always be installed when operating the radio. Operating the
radio without an antenna greatly reduces the range of the radio.
Figure 4. Attaching the antenna to the radio.
5. To attach and remove the belt clip by.
a. Align the belt clip to the mounting rails on the back of the radio (Figure 5B).
b. Push the belt clip down until it clicks into place.
c. To remove, pull tab on belt clip away from radio to release (Figure 5C).
d. Slide belt clip up and off.
________________________________________________________________
VI-7
113-SL1-XX10E
Figure 5. Attaching and removing the belt clip.
6. Program the radio to change code and bandwidth settings.
a. Hold Push-To-Talk button down while turning radio on (Figure 6J). The radio
announces current code setting. Example: “code one”.
b. Press Push-To-Talk to scroll through codes (Figure 6K). The radio announces
each code as you scroll. Example: “two, three, four”.
c. Release Push-To-Talk when you have reached desired code.
d. Press Monitor button to select and save new code setting (Figure 6L). Radio
“beeps”, then announces current band setting. Example: band two five point zero”.
e. Press Push-To-Talk to toggle between bands (Figure 6K). Radio announces each
band as you toggle. Example: “one two point five”.
f. Press Monitor button to select and save new band setting (Figure 6L). Radio
“beeps” to indicate it has exited programming and is ready for use.
Figure 6. Changing code and bandwidth settings on the radio.
NOTES: 1. Code numbers with two digits (10-38) will be announced “one zero, three
eight”.
2. You can only scroll forward when selecting a code.
3. When you are changing your code or band, you can not send messages.
4. The code and band settings apply to all channels. You can not select a different
code or band for each channel.
5. TalkAbout Distance radios have 10-channels and 38-Interference Eliminator
Codes. To talk to others, all radios in your group must be set to the same channel
and code
________________________________________________________________
VI-8
113-SL1-XX10E
TalkAbout
Codes
Hz
Frequency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
OFF
67.0
71.9
74.4
77.0
79.7
82.5
85.4
88.5
91.5
94.8
97.4
100.0
103.5
107.2
110.9
114.8
118.8
123.0
127.3
Sports 7/7X
Codes
A
B
C
D
E
F
TalkAbout
Codes
Hz
Frequency
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
131.8
136.5
141.3
146.2
151.4
156.7
162.2
167.9
173.8
179.9
186.2
192.8
203.5
210.7
218.1
225.7
233.6
241.8
250.3
Sports
7/7X
Codes
G
None
Table 2. Interference eliminator code chart.
NOTE: “OFF” means you can hear all activity on the channel.
Channel
MHz
1
462.5625
2
462.5875
3
462.6125
4
462.6375
5
462.6625
6
462.6875
7
462.7125
A
462.5750
B
462.6250
C
462.6750 (Emergency Channel)
S
Scan
________________________________________________________________
VI-9
113-SL1-XX10E
Table 3. Radio channel and MHz selection.
statement.
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that he is to prepare the radio to operate on the TalkAbout
radio.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Checks the radio to ensure the POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME is OFF.
P
F
2. Installs and removes the Ni-Cad battery pack.
P
F
3. Explains the charging cycle of a Ni-Cad battery pack.
P
F
4. Installs and removes AAA alkaline batteries.
P
F
5. Attaches and removes the antenna.
P
F
Results
6. Attaches and removes the belt-clip.
P
F
7. Programs the radio to change code and bandwidth settings.
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
None
Related
None
Results
________________________________________________________________
VI-10
113-SL1-XX11E
OPERATE A MOTOROLA TALKABOUT PORTABLE RADIO IN
URBAN TERRAIN
113-SL1-XX11E
CONDITIONS
Given a NLOS portable radio with UHF capability, radio accessories, an assigned channel
frequency, and call signs.
STANDARDS
Place the portable radio into operation and operate it in the UHF-channel mode. Load and
store the required channel frequency in the radio’s memory. Set the switches and controls to
their correct positions to perform their desired functions for monitoring, receiving, and sending
a message.
1. Turn the Radio ON/OFF.
a. Turn the ON-OFF/Volume knob clockwise. You will hear a beep and see the
Transmit Light flash momentarily to indicate the radio is on. To turn the radio off, turn the
ON-OFF/Volume knob counterclockwise. You will a click to indicate the radio is turned off.
b. To check and adjust the volume you hold the Monitor button to listen to the audio
level while rotating the ON-OFF/Volume knob.
2. To send and receive messages.
NOTE: Check channel activity by pressing Monitor button. You will hear static if the channel
is clear to use. Do not transmit if someone is talking on channel.
a. To send messages, press Push-To-Talk and speak into radio. (To maximize
clarity, hold radio 1 to 2 inches from mouth) (Figure 1M).
________________________________________________________________
VI-11
113-SL1-XX11E
Figure 1. Speaking distance when using the radio.
b. The Transmit Light will glow continuously when sending messages.
c. To listen for messages, release the Push-To-Talk button.
3. Radios’ talk range.
NOTES: 1. Do not use the radios closer than 5 feet apart for clarity.
2. These are line of sight radios and talk range will be affected by concrete
structures, heavy foliage and operating radios indoors and in vehicles.
Figure 2. Talk range vs. obstruction
4. Time-Out Timer:
•
Prevents channel congestion and helps extend battery life.
•
The radio will sound a warning tone if the Push-To-Talk button is pressed for 60 continuos
seconds and will stop transmitting.
5. Scan:
________________________________________________________________
VI-12
113-SL1-XX11E
a. Allows you to monitor the radio’s channels and code.
b. When the radio detects talking, it stops scanning and locks in on the active channel.
c. The radio allows you to listen and talk back automatically to the person transmitting
without having to switch channels.
NOTE: To communicate in scan, your radio must be set to the same code as the other radio
(s) in your group. If your radio is set to a different code, the scan feature will not
detect channel activity in your group.
d. To use Scan feature:
•
Move the Channel Selector knob to the “s” position (Figure 3N).
•
When the radio detects someone talking, you will the message.
•
Press Push-To-Talk button to talk back on the channel. If channel activity ceases,
the radio will return to scan mode after three seconds.
•
In scan, you will always transmit back to the channel that last sent a message.
Figure 3. Radio scan features.
NOTES: 1. In scan, after you receive a message, the radio will remain on that channel for
three seconds before returning to scan mode.
2. If you set the Channel Selector knob to the “S” position (scan mode) and no
activity is detected, you will transmit on channel-1 when you press the Push-ToTalk button.
________________________________________________________________
VI-13
113-SL1-XX11E
6. Operate the built-in Voice Activated Transmission (VOX) with peripherals. Allows hands
free operation of the radio.
a. To use VOX feature:
•
Turn the radio OFF.
•
Open Accessory Jack Cover and plug accessory’s connector firmly into jack.
•
Turn the radio ON and lower volume before placing accessory on head or in ear.
Press Monitor button while rotating Volume knob to adjust volume to a comfortable
listening level.
•
To transmit, speak into accessory microphone. To receive, stop talking.
NOTE: There will be a brief delay between when you start or stop talking and radio
transmission.
b. Exit VOX feature:
•
Press Push-To-Talk button once.
•
To transmit, press Push-To-Talk button.
•
To receive messages, release Push-To-Talk button.
•
To return to VOX mode, turn the radio OFF, then ON again.
NOTE: The Accessory Jack Cover is not detachable and should be closed when not in use.
Setup: At the test site, provide all equipment and materials listed in the task conditions
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier to operate the radio on the UHF channel frequency and transmit
a message.
EVALUATION GUIDE
________________________________________________________________
VI-14
113-SL1-XX11E
Results
1. Turns the radio on and adjusted the volume.
P
F
2. Sets the radio controls to receive a message.
P
F
3. Transmits a message.
P
F
4. Sets the Time-Out Timer.
P
F
5. Sets the radio to Scan and demonstrates Scan function.
P
F
6. Connects the peripherals.
P
F
P
F
7. Operates the built-in VOX.
P
8. Demonstrates how to exit the VOX function.
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
None
Related
None
________________________________________________________________
VI-15
071-SL1-XX20
USE AN UNDER-BARREL PAINTBALL MARKER
071-SL1-XX20
NOTE: Information on this technology was not received in time for
publication.
CONDITIONS
Given an under-barrel paintball marker.
STANDARDS
Place the under-barrel paintball marker into operation. Load the under-barrel paintball marker.
Fire the under-barrel paintball marker to hit the target.
1. .
Setup: At the test site, provide all equipment and materials listed in the task conditions
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier to operate the under-barrel paintball marker.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1.
P
F
2.
P
F
3.
P
F
4.
P
F
5.
P
F
FEEDBACK
________________________________________________________________
VI-16
071-SL1-XX20
REFERENCES
Required
None
Related
None
________________________________________________________________
VI-17
071-SL1-XX15A
MOUNT THE IMPROVED SLING
071-SL1-XX15A
NOTE: Information on this technology was not received in time for
publication.
CONDITIONS
As a member of an assault element in urban terrain, given an individual weapon (M4 or
M16A2) with ammunition and load carrying equipment and a requirement to mount the
Improved Sling onto the weapon.
STANDARDS
The sling is mounted to provide individual with weapons security and control.
1.
2.
3.
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he has completed PMCS on the rifle and must now mount
the sling to the weapon.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1.
P
F
2.
P
F
3.
P
F
________________________________________________________________
VI-18
071-SL1-XX15A
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
Mounting Instructions
Related
None
________________________________________________________________
VI-19
071-SL2-XX18A
DIRECT TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT OF AN URBIE UNMANNED
GROUND VEHICLE IN URBAN TERRAIN
071-SL2-XX18A
CONDITIONS
conducting reconnaissance and/or security in urban terrain. Both enemy forces and
noncombatants could be present on the battlefield. The team is equipped with all TO&E
equipment authorized. Given a URBIE Unmanned Ground Vehicle (UGV) complete. Given
STANDARDS
The fire team completes the reconnaissance mission in accordance with the OPORD and/or
FRAGO.
1. Plans for the use of the UGV. Must specifically determine:
a. The critical information to be obtained and reported in accordance with the PIR/IR.
b. If the benefit of the information gained by employment of the UGV outweighs the
principals of urban combat:
•
Speed.
•
Surprise.
•
Lethality of firepower.
c. An employment position for the team to occupy. This position should be
considered using the acronym OCOKA (Figure 1).
d. The distance required for the UGV to travel to gain the desired information (this
information may not be known until on the objective). The operational distance can vary from
only several meters to kilometers.
________________________________________________________________
VI-20
071-SL2-XX18A
Figure 1. UGV employment
e. If intelligence is desired of the inside of a multi-story building or in a subterranean
passageway, deployment of the UGV must be carefully planned (Figure 3). Determination
ahead of time must be made to know the capabilities of the UGV such as the capability to climb
stairs and negotiate obstacles (Figure 2). Other assets may be required to get the UGV to the
desired location such as ladders to place the UGV inside, hoisting, moving, or even throwing
the UGV through a window or mousehole, or lowering the UGV into a subterranean
passageway or a lower floor of a multi-story building. The URBIE has a weight of 28 pounds.
Figure 2. Urbie climbing stairs.
________________________________________________________________
VI-21
071-SL2-XX18A
Figure 3. Deployment of UGV in subterranean passageways.
f. Plan for the use of a communication frequency for command and control and the
band required for video feedback from the UGV. Determine if the fire team will record the
image or view it only.
NOTE: If the use of a tether is considered, it must be carefully thought out. The enemy
could follow the tether back to the employment position and compromise the security
of the fire team.
2. Ensure the team prepares for employment of the UGV during pre-combat operations.
a. Inspect and inventory the UGV during pre-combat operations to ensure it is mission
capable. This includes and is not limited to:
•
Batteries are charged.
•
Control console, video camera, and UGV are operational.
b. Assemble the UGV prior to start of the mission and conduct rehearsals using the
device. Depending upon the concept of the operation, leave the UGV assembled or
disassemble and prepare it for movement.
c. Coordinate for the use of the radio link frequency used by the URBIE UGV during
________________________________________________________________
VI-22
071-SL2-XX18A
the mission. For instance, make sure no other unit is using a UGV in the same frequency range
within your area of operation. This coordination can prevent loss of control of the UGV.
d. Gather any additional resources necessary to accomplish the employment of the
UGV such as ladders to help emplace the device, boards or panels to aid in mobility, or
additional antennas to enhance the effective range.
e. Be familiar with the capabilities of the UGV for the urban terrain the team is
operating in. Specifically, the squad leader ensures:
•
The radio link (operational range is approximately 150 meters) is known and
understood.
•
The length of time of operation (battery life is approximately 1.25 hours). Plan the
type of movement necessary to accomplish the mission. Determine if the UGV will
remain stationary in a static position such as an OP to conduct surveillance of an
assigned AA, TAI, or NAI. These determinations will help with battery
consumption.
e. Plan for the type payload the UGV will employ. These can include and are not
limited to different cameras, antennas, munitions, and/or a towed trailer. These items are
UGV specific and the capability to employ them must be known ahead of time
3. Direct the occupation of the employment position.
a. Directs the fire team to maintain local security at the position.
b. Ensure the operator confirms the command and control of the UGV at the last
covered and concealed position and the UGV provides adequate video image.
4. Direct the employment of the UGV.
a. Ensure the operator maneuvers the UGV tactically. Maneuvers the UGV adhering
to the same fundamentals of movement as an individual soldier would use in urban terrain. This
will enhance the survivability of the UGV and possibly the fire team. Things to consider are:
•
Use the terrain for protection and use all available cover and concealment. Make
maximum use of the cover and concealment in urban terrain to enhance the
survivability of the UGV and mission accomplishment. For example: Use rubble
piles to pause the UGV behind or move the UGV in the shadows of building.
•
Avoid skylining. Do not allow the UGV to be silhouetted against a skyline.
________________________________________________________________
VI-23
071-SL2-XX18A
•
Avoid direct forward movement. Moving forward from a defilade position may
enable the enemy to detect the UGV and destroy it. This is especially true of the
initial movement from the employment position. The least desirable scenario is to
have the enemy detect the UGV moving directly from the location of the operators.
•
Avoid open areas, possible kill zones, and suspected enemy observation sectors.
If these areas must be crossed, have the UGV stop short and conduct surveillance
of the adjacent terrain to the best of the operator’s ability.
b. Gathers necessary information. Records the information and/or the image for
further evaluation.
c. Ensures team maintains security at employment site.
d. Maintains situation awareness of the UGV if the UGV is not within line of sight of
the operator.
e. In addition to specific uses of the UGV, some other areas where the UGV can be
considered an asset are:
•
Use of the URBIE UGV during checkpoint operations to view and record
personnel, equipment, and vehicles.
•
Mobile platform to transport specific munitions and equipment.
5. Report all essential information gained by UGV to higher.
6. Direct the recovery of the UGV.
a. Have the employment team maneuver the UGV back to the employment position.
This may allow maximum cover and concealment for the employment team to recover the UGV.
b. Position the UGV where it will be out of line of sight and line of fire with the enemy.
The operating team or another element can pick up the UGV at another time as the tactical
situation permits.
Setup: This task will be tested during a platoon or larger tactical exercise. At the test site,
provide all the equipment given in the conditions statement. Provide an urban area that includes
as a minimum a two-story structure.
________________________________________________________________
VI-24
071-SL2-XX18A
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier using the instructions and information given by the squad leader
the route to the employment position. Inform him that PIR/IR can be obtained within 50 meters
of the employment position and in the second floor of the two-story structure.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Plans for the use of the UGV.
P
F
2. Ensures the team prepares for employment of the UGV.
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
5. Report all essential information gained by UGV to higher leader.
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
Manufacturers Operating Manual
Related
________________________________________________________________
VI-25
071-SL2-XX18B
DIRECT TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT OF A SAM UNMANNED
GROUND VEHICLE IN URBAN TERRAIN
071-SL2-XX18B
CONDITIONS
equipment authorized. Given a SAM Unmanned Ground Vehicle (UGV) complete. Given
STANDARDS
FRAGO.
•
Speed.
•
Surprise.
•
________________________________________________________________
VI-26
071-SL2-XX18B
Figure 1. Employment of the UGV
stairs and negotiate obstacles. Other assets may be required to get the UGV to the desired
location such as ladders to place the UGV inside, hoisting, moving, or throwing the UGV
through a window or mousehole, or lowering the UGV into a subterranean passageway or a
lower floor of a multi-story building. The SAM UGV has a weight of 10 pounds, and
consideration should be made if throwing it into a structure is the desired means of entry so as
not to damage the equipment (Figure 3).
________________________________________________________________
VI-27
071-SL2-XX18B
Figure 3. Deployment of UGV to an upper story.
________________________________________________________________
VI-28
071-SL2-XX18B
of the fire team.
•
•
Wearable vest with controller, video camera and mount, heads-up display glasses,
and UGV are operational.
device. Assembly may be mounting specific cameras or pan and tilt assembly mounts or
specific peripherals to the control of the UGV. Depending upon the concept of the operation,
leave the UGV assembled or disassemble and prepare it for movement.
Figure 3. Sam assembled.
c. Coordinate for the use of the radio link frequency used by the SAM UGV during
the mission. For instance, make sure no other unit is using a UGV in the same frequency range
within your area of operation. This coordination can prevent loss of control of the UGV.
UGV such as ladders to help emplace the device, boards or panels to aid in the mobility, or
additional antennas to enhance the effective range. This could include the use of tracks placed
on the UGV wheels to enhance mobility in urban terrain (if the UGV can be configured this
________________________________________________________________
VI-29
071-SL2-XX18B
way).
•
understood.
•
The length of time of operation (battery life is approximately 1.0 hours). Plan the
type of movement necessary to accomplish the mission. Determine if the UGV will
remain stationary in a static position such as an OP to conduct surveillance of an
assigned AA, TAI, or NAI. These determinations will help with battery
consumption.
•
piles to pause the UGV behind or move the UGV in the shadows of building. The
fact that the SAM UGV has a top mounted camera allows the UGV body to remain
behind cover while only the camera may be unmasked to be able to view beyond
the cover.
•
•
________________________________________________________________
VI-30
071-SL2-XX18B
have the enemy detect the UGV moving directly from where the operators are
located.
•
of the adjacent terrain to the best of the operator's ability.
further evaluation.
the operator.
•
Use of the SAM UGV during checkpoint operations to view and record personnel,
equipment, and vehicles.
•
situation permits.
________________________________________________________________
VI-31
071-SL2-XX18B
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
Related
________________________________________________________________
VI-32
071-SL2-XX18C
DIRECT TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT OF A LEMMING
UNMANNED GROUND VEHICLE IN URBAN TERRAIN
071-SL2-XX18C
CONDITIONS
equipment authorized. Given a LEMMING Unmanned Ground Vehicle (UGV) complete.
Given specific Rules of Engagement (ROE).
STANDARDS
FRAGO.
•
Speed.
•
Surprise.
•
________________________________________________________________
VI-33
071-SL2-XX18C
Figure 1. UGV employment.
stairs and negotiate obstacles. Other assets may be required to get the UGV to the desired
location such as ladders to place the UGV inside, hoisting, throwing, or moving the UGV
through a window or mousehole, or lowering the UGV into a subterranean passageway or a
lower floor of a multi-story building. The LEMMING weighs approximately 30.5 pounds.
________________________________________________________________
VI-34
071-SL2-XX18C
NOTE: If the use of a tether is considered, it must be carefully thought out. The enemy could
follow the tether back to the employment position and compromise the security of the
fire team.
•
•
Compass is serviceable and operational.
•
Video cameras, antennas, mounts, and UGV are operational.
device. Assembly may be mounting specific cameras or pan and tilt assembly mounts or
specific peripherals to the control of the UGV. Depending upon the concept of the operation,
________________________________________________________________
VI-35
071-SL2-XX18C
leave the UGV assembled or disassemble and prepare it for movement.
Figure 3. Lemming assembled.
c. Coordinate for the use of the radio link frequency used by the LEMMING UGV
during the mission. For instance, make sure no other unit is using a UGV in the same
frequency range within your area of operation. This coordination can prevent loss of control of
the UGV.
UGV such as ladders to help emplace the device, boards or panels to aid in mobility, or
•
understood.
•
The length of time of operation. Plan the type of movement necessary to
accomplish the mission. Determine if the UGV will remain stationary in a static
position such as an OP to conduct surveillance of an assigned AA, TAI, or NAI.
These determinations will help with battery consumption.
________________________________________________________________
VI-36
071-SL2-XX18C
•
piles to pause the UGV behind or move the UGV in the shadows of building. The
fact that the LEMMING UGV has a mast raising camera with tilt capability allows
the UGV body to remain behind cover while only the camera may be unmasked to
be able to view beyond the cover.
•
•
located.
•
further evaluation.
the operator.
•
Use of the LEMMING UGV during checkpoint operations to view and record
________________________________________________________________
VI-37
•
071-SL2-XX18C
situation permits.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
P
F
P
F
Results
P
F
P
P
F
P
F
F
________________________________________________________________
VI-38
071-SL2-XX18C
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
Related
________________________________________________________________
VI-39
071-SL2-XX18D
DIRECT TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT OF A MATILDA
UNMANNED GROUND VEHICLE IN URBAN TERRAIN
071-SL2-XX18D
CONDITIONS
equipment authorized. Given a Mesa Associates' Tactical Integrated Light-Force Deployment
Assembly (MATILDA) Unmanned Ground Vehicle (UGV) complete. Given specific Rules of
Engagement (ROE).
STANDARDS
FRAGO.
•
Speed.
•
Surprise.
•
________________________________________________________________
VI-40
071-SL2-XX18D
Figure 1. UGV employment.
passageway, deployment of the UGV must be carefully planned. Determination ahead of time
must be made to know the capabilities of the UGV such as the capability to climb stairs and
negotiate obstacles (Figures 2 and 3). Other assets may be required to get the UGV to the
desired location such as ladders to place the UGV inside, hoisting or moving the UGV through
a window or mousehole, or lowering the UGV into a subterranean passageway or a lower floor
of a multi-story building. The MATILDA weighs approximately 55 pounds.
Figure 3. Matilda at top of stairs.
________________________________________________________________
VI-41
071-SL2-XX18D
of the fire team.
•
•
Compass is serviceable and operational.
•
Video cameras, antennas, mounts, and UGV are operational.
device. In addition to assembly of the 4 modules of MATILDA, additional payloads such as
explosives or other munitions may have to be configured. Depending upon the concept of the
________________________________________________________________
VI-42
071-SL2-XX18D
operation, leave the UGV assembled or disassemble and prepare it for movement (Figure 4).
Figure 4. Matilda assembled for operation with video recorder.
c. Coordinate for the use of the radio link frequency used by the MATILDA UGV
during the mission. For instance, make sure no other unit is using a UGV in the same
frequency range within your area of operation. This coordination can prevent loss of control of
the UGV.
UGV such as ladders to help emplace the device, boards or panels to aid in the mobility, or
•
The radio link (operational range is approximately 300 yards) is known and
understood.
•
The length of time of operation. The MATILDA has an Operation Time of 2
hours. Plan the type of movement necessary to accomplish the mission. Determine
if the UGV will remain stationary in a static position such as an OP to conduct
surveillance of an assigned AA, TAI, or NAI. These determinations will help with
battery consumption.
limited to different cameras, antennas, munitions, and/or a towed trailer (Figure 5). The
MATILDA has a payload capacity of 100 pounds and a towed load of 450 pounds. The
________________________________________________________________
VI-43
071-SL2-XX18D
UGV may be capable of numerous tasks and considerations should be given for all to aid in
success of the mission.
Figure 5. Matilda with trailer.
•
piles to pause the UGV behind or move the UGV in the shadows of building.
•
•
________________________________________________________________
VI-44
071-SL2-XX18D
located.
•
further evaluation.
the operator.
•
Use of the MATILDA UGV during checkpoint operations to view and record
•
situation permits.
________________________________________________________________
VI-45
071-SL2-XX18D
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
Related
________________________________________________________________
VI-46
051-SL2-XX19A
EMPLOY THE BEAST TO CREATE A MAN-SIZED HOLE
051-SL2-XX19A
CONDITIONS
As a member of an assault element in urban terrain, given an individual weapon (M4 or
M16A2) with ammunition and load bearing equipment, a requirement to create a man-sized
hole in concrete in urban terrain, and a Beast complete with all accessories.
NOTE: Accessories include initiating systems. (See Tasks Construct a Nonelectric Initiating
Assembly with MDI, 051-193-1103 or Construct a Dual Firing System with MDI,
051-193-1202 for necessary MDI accessories for initiating systems.)
STANDARDS
The Beast is employed creating a man-sized hole in concrete and causing minimal damage to the
structure.
1. Inspect and inventory the breaching device and all accessories for accountability and
serviceability.
2. Select the site to be breached.
3. Select the site to emplace the breaching device.
4. Select a firing site. The firing site should provide enough cover and concealment to all
members of the breaching, assault, and support elements.
5. Determine the amount of explosives necessary to breach the target.
6. Prepare the Beast for the breaching mission.
a. Unroll the Beast on a flat surface, spreading the "blanket" out evenly.
b. Insert the appropriate amount of explosives into the "pockets" of the blanket.
Ensure the explosives are evenly placed throughout the breaching "blanket".
________________________________________________________________
VI-47
051-SL2-XX19A
c. Prime the Beast IAW tasks: Construct a Nonelectric Initiating Assembly with
MDI, 051-193-1103, or Construct a Dual Firing System with MDI, 051-193-1202.
d. Roll the Beast back into a suitable carrying size and shape.
e. Mark the munition (IAW SOP) to designate to friendly soldiers the location of the
device.
7. Emplace the Beast device against the site to be breached. Secure the MDI shock tube
vicinity of the Beast. This will insure the Beast is not disturbed if the tube is pulled.
8. Secure the MDI shock tube at the firing position.
9. Initiate the breaching device.
Setup: During training, use only inert explosives and demolitions. At the test site, provide all
materials, tools, and equipment given in the task conditions statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he will give a verbal signal of "Fire in the Hole" for
training only when initiating the device.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Inspect and inventory the breaching device and all accessories.
P
F
P
F
P
F
4. Select a firing site.
P
F
6. Prepare the Beast for the breaching mission.
P
F
Results
P
F
7. Emplace the Beast against the site to be breached.
P F
________________________________________________________________
VI-48
051-SL2-XX19A
8. Return to the firing position and initiate the breaching device.
P
F
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
Manufacturers Instructions
Related
None
________________________________________________________________
VI-49
051-SL2-XX19C
EMPLOY EXPLOSIVE CUTTING TAPE (ECT) TO CREATE A
MAN-SIZED HOLE
051-SL2-XX19C
CONDITIONS
As a member of an assault element in urban terrain, given an individual weapon (M4 or M16
series) with ammunition and LCE, a requirement to create a man-sized hole in concrete in
urban terrain, and Explosive Cutting Tape (ECT) munition complete with all accessories.
NOTE: Accessories include initiating systems (see Tasks: Construct a Nonelectric Initiating
Assembly with MDI, 051-193-1103, or Construct a Dual Firing System with MDI,
051-193-1202, for necessary MDI accessories for initiating systems).
STANDARDS
The Explosive Cutting Tape munition is employed creating a man-sized hole in concrete and
causing minimal damage to the structure.
1. Inspect and inventory the breaching munition and all accessories for accountability and
serviceability.
2. Select the site to be breached and the desired breach (entry) point.
3. Ensure a good covered and concealed route is selected for movement to the breach (entry)
point.
4. Select a firing site. The firing site should provide enough cover and concealment to all
members of the breaching, assault, and/or support elements.
5. Determine the amount of explosives necessary to breach the target. Select from 300
through 5400 grains/ft charges. Determine the desired length of charge.
6. Prepare the Explosive Cutting Tape (ECT) munition for the breaching mission.
a. Lay out the ECT on a soft, non-metallic, clean surface that is free of grit. These
________________________________________________________________
VI-50
051-SL2-XX19C
can include materials such as plastic, cardboard, and wood.
b. Cut the ECT to the desired length of the breach required (Figure 1).
Figure 1. Cut the ECT.
DANGER
To prevent the possibility of a premature detonation, which could cause
loss of life, cut the ECT with a sharp, non-sparking knife or razor.
c. Select from one of three methods to prime the ECT.
CAUTION
To ensure the ECT provides the desired explosive cut, care must be taken
when priming the ECT. The detonator must not penetrate the charge. The end
of the detonator must be in intimate contact only.
(a) End initiation of the ECT.
•
Peel back the top of the protective foam housing for a distance of
approximately two inches.
•
Attach the detonator to the top of the exposed explosive at one end of the
charge (Figure 2).
________________________________________________________________
VI-51
051-SL2-XX19C
Figure 2. Prime the end of the ECT.
•
Secure the detonator to the ECT with tape.
(b) Top initiation of the ECT.
•
Remove a two-inch section of the foam casing to expose the explosive
charge (Figure 3).
Figure 3. Prime the top of the ECT
•
Attach the detonator firmly to the explosive with tape.
(c) Using a sheet explosive such as M118 molded to the end as in a pigtail
fashion.
•
Remove the top part of the protective foram casing to expose the explosive
charge.
•
Mould the sheet explosive to the contour of the charge (Figure 4)
________________________________________________________________
VI-52
051-SL2-XX19C
Figure 4. Prime the ECT with sheet explosive.
•
Prime the sheet explosive.
(d) Mark the munitions (IAW SOP) to designate the device to friendly
soldiers.
7. Emplace the ECT munition against the site to be breached.
a. Remove the outer coating of the double-sided tape by peeling it back.
b. If additional adhesive substances are needed to ensure the ECT adheres to the
target in the shape of the desired cut, apply them at this time.
c. Affix the ECT to the target in the shape of the desired cut.
d. Secure the MDI shock tube vicinity of the ECT, if needed. This will insure the
ECT is not disturbed if the tube is pulled.
e. Move back to the firing position.
8. Secure the MDI shock tube at the firing position.
9. Initiate the breaching device.
Setup: During training, use only inert explosives and demolitions. At the test site, provide all
materials, tools, and equipment given in the task conditions statement.
________________________________________________________________
VI-53
051-SL2-XX19C
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he will give a verbal signal of "Fire in the Hole" for
training only when initiating the device.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Results
1. Inspect and inventory the breaching device and all accessories.
P
F
P
F
P
F
4. Select a firing site.
P
F
P
F
P
F
6. Prepare the ECT for the breaching mission.
P
F
7. Emplace the ECT against the site to be breached.
P
F
8. Return to the firing position and initiate the breaching device.
FEEDBACK
REFERENCES
Required
Manufacturers Instructions
Related
None
________________________________________________________________
VI-54
MQS-XXX5
STP 7-11II-MQS
CONDUCT RECONNAISSANCE OF A ZONE, AREA, OR ROUTE
MQS-XXX5
CONDITIONS
The platoon is required to reconnoiter a zone, area, or route. The platoon is operating
separately and provides its own security. The platoon is equipped with a complete Unmanned
Aerial Vehicle (UAV) Pointer and a complete Unmanned Ground Vehicle (UGV). Enemy
elements have indirect fire and close air (CAS) capabilities.
STANDARDS
Determine all priority intelligence requirements (PIR) and other intelligence requirements
specified in the order for its assigned zone, area, or route. Reconnoiter without the enemy
learning the strength, location, or intentions of the main element. Complete the reconnaissance
and report all information by the time specified in the order.
1. Conduct an aerial reconnaissance of urban terrain.
a. Determine the critical information to be obtained and reported in accordance with
the PIR/IR.
b. Determine if the benefit of the information gained by employment of the UAV
outweighs the principals of urban combat:
•
Speed.
•
Surprise.
•
c. Organize the platoon reconnaissance and security elements and prepare for combat.
Determine if more than one aircraft deployment team will be used. An example is: One team
farthest from the objective launches the UAV and flies it towards the objective. At a
prearranged location, a second team takes over control of the UAV and flies it the rest of the
way to the objective. This could enhance the stealth and security of the team closest to the
objective in that they do not have to launch an aircraft. Have the employment team(s) prepare
for combat operations. Determine the number of aircraft and ground control units that will be
required.
________________________________________________________________
VI-55
STP 7-11II-MQS
MQS-XXX5
d. Determine the duration of the flight. This will help determine the type of batteries to
use and plan for length of time on the objective.
e. Select the flight path to the objective. Select the type of flight path that provides the
most security to the employment team. Determine the employment location(s).
f. Consider the effects of the weather. This could influence among other things
operational height of the UAV and the length of the flight.
g. Determine the type of camera to utilize. Consider the weather, light data, and
desired information to obtain. To best utilize the mounted camera, certain flying characteristics
will enhance the target acquisition. These characteristics include and are not limited to:
Circular loitering (ideal for sideways mounted cameras) and straight in approaches (ideal for
forward-looking mounted cameras).
(1) Daylight camera is:
•
Mounted to look forward. The camera is mounted to look forward and at
a 20 degree downward angle.
•
Mounted to look sideways. The camera is mounted to look to the left of
the UAV at a 20 degree downward angle.
(2) IR camera is:
•
Mounted to look sideways: The camera is mounted to look to the left of
the UAV at a 20 degree downward angle.
•
Forward looking (as of this writing, this mounting technique is not available
for the IR camera).
h. Select the type of flight path to use on the objective.
.
•
Pilot controlled flight path, regardless of the method of camera mounted.
•
Preprogrammed circular-loiter (ideally used for sideways mounted cameras).
•
Preprogrammed straight in approach such as a figure eight to target (ideally used for
forward mounted cameras).
i. Have the UAV employment team(s) prepare for combat.
j. Initiate the reconnaissance. Command the employment team(s) to launch the aircraft.
________________________________________________________________
VI-56
MQS-XXX5
STP 7-11II-MQS
(1) Fly to the urban area of interest under pilot control or via way points.
•
Observe the area of interest.
•
Detect any personnel moving in the urban area.
•
Detect any vehicles stationary or moving in the urban area.
•
Detect any enemy positions.
(2) Report activity and disposition IAW PIR/IR as found in the OPORD or
FRAGO.
k. Receive and analyze the information received from the UAV.
•
During offensive operations, the platoon leader could determine if he can maneuver
effectively against the enemy as known from video capture of the UAV (Figure 1
and 2).
•
During defensive operations, the platoon leader gains information about the enemy
and decides when and where to employ actions against them (Figure 3).
2. Conduct a reconnaissance utilizing an Unmanned Ground Vehicle (UGV).
a. Conduct detailed planning that must include:
(1) The critical information to be obtained and reported in accordance with the
PIR/IR found in the OPORD/FRAGO.
(2) If the benefit of the information gained by employment of the UGV
outweighs the principals of urban combat:
•
Speed.
•
Surprise.
•
(3) Designating an employment team to utilize the UGV and all support
necessary to accomplish the mission.
(4) An employment position for the team to occupy.
________________________________________________________________
VI-57
STP 7-11II-MQS
MQS-XXX5
(5) The distance required for the UGV to travel to gain the desired information
(this information may not be known until on the objective).
(6) If intelligence is desired of the inside of a second story or higher structure,
planning must include other assets that may be required to get the UGV to the desired location
such as soldiers climbing ladders to place the UGV inside, throwing the UGV through a
window.
b. Ensures the platoon prepares for employment of the UGV during pre-combat
operations.
(1) Inspects and inventories the UGV during pre-combat inspections to ensure
it is mission capable. This includes and is not limited to:
•
•
Control panel and UGV are operational.
(2) Coordinates for the use of the radio link frequency used by the UGV
during the mission (for instance, makes sure no other unit is using a UGV in the same frequency
range within your area of operation. This coordination can prevent loss of control of the UGV).
(3) Gathers any additional resources necessary to accomplish the employment
of the UGV such as ladders to help emplace the device, boards or panels to aid in the mobility,
(4) Conducts rehearsals with the reconnaissance teams and support teams
performing their missions.
c. Direct the employment of the UGV. Command the team to occupy a position to
employ the UGV.
(1) Ensure the support elements maintain security at the employment position.
(2) Confirms line of sight considerations for control of the UGV and video
downlink.
d. Direct the employment of the UGV.
(1) Receive and analyze the intelligence.
(2) Ensure the platoon continues to provide security at employment site.
________________________________________________________________
VI-58
MQS-XXX5
STP 7-11II-MQS
e. Reports essential information gained by UGV to higher leader.
f. Use the information gained by the UGV to provide success to the platoon's offensive
and defensive operations.
3. Conduct a zone reconnaissance.
a. Organize the platoon reconnaissance and security elements and prepare for combat.
b. Select a series of objective rally points (ORPs) or rendezvous points throughout the
zone from which to operate.
c. Select the technique for the platoon to reconnoiter the zone: fan method,
converging-routes method, or successive-sectors methods.
d. Designate times for the reconnaissance elements to return to the ORP or to link up
at the rendezvous point.
e. Move tactically to and occupy the ORP.
f. Control the reconnaissance elements from the ORP or lead a reconnaissance team,
depending upon the situation.
4. Conduct an area reconnaissance.
a. Organize the platoon into separate or combined reconnaissance and security
elements, and prepare for combat.
b. Conduct a leader's reconnaissance to confirm the objective and the plan.
Subordinate leaders and key personnel accompany the platoon leader on the reconnaissance.
These actions occur:
(1) Issue a contingency plan before departure to include actions on contact
and what to do if not back by a specified time.
(2) Maintain communications with the platoon throughout the reconnaissance.
(3) Designate at least two men to keep the objective under surveillance.
c. Return with the reconnaissance party to the ORP and (1) Confirm the plan or issue a fragmentary order (FRAGO) to change it.
________________________________________________________________
VI-59
STP 7-11II-MQS
MQS-XXX5
(2) Allow subordinate leaders time to brief personnel.
d. Conduct one of the following:
(1) Long range observation and surveillance by moving to an observation point
(OP) that offers cover and concealment and that is far enough from the objective to be outside
of enemy small-arms range and local security measures. Gather all PIR by using the keyword
SALUTE (size, activity, location, unit, time, and equipment). If information cannot be
gathered from one OP, a series of OPs, occupied by one or more reconnaissance teams, may
be used.
(2) Short-range observation and surveillance by moving to a point near the
objective that is within the range of enemy small-arms fire and local security measures. Pass
through any outposts, defensive wire, or minefields to get close enough to gain information.
Gather all PIR by using the keyword SALUTE.
5. Conduct a route reconnaissance.
a. Organize and prepare the platoon for combat.
b. Collect and report information about the route and the adjacent terrain.
(1) Determine trafficability.
(2) Locate bridges, fords, and crossing sites.
(3) Locate underpasses, tunnels, and culverts.
(4) Identify restrictive curves, passages, and obstacles.
(5) Complete and confirm the map reconnaissance.
c. Identify all enemy forces that can influence the route.
(1) Determine enemy locations, strength, composition, and activity.
(2) Locate enemy supporting units and weapons.
(3) Identify the possible avenues of approach.
d. Prepare a route classification overlay that shows________________________________________________________________
VI-60
MQS-XXX5
STP 7-11II-MQS
(1) The beginning and end coordinates of the route.
(2) The trace of the route.
(3) All sharp curves and restrictions to traffic flow, to include bypass
capabilities.
(4) Level and even crossings.
(5) The length and width of constrictions.
6. Return to the ORP undetected by the enemy.
7. Collect the information and disseminate it to all platoon members through subordinate
leaders.
8. Account for all personnel.
9. Depart the ORP.
10. Forward all PIR and other intelligence information to higher headquarters as soon as
possible.
REFERENCES
ARTEP 7-8-MTP
FM 7-8
ARTEP 7-90-MTP
FM 7-70
ARTEP 7-92-MTP
TEC 010-071-6482-A (065)
Manufacturers Instructions for UAV
Manufacturers Instructions for UGV
________________________________________________________________
VI-61
STP 7-11II-MQS
MQS-XXX5
________________________________________________________________
VI-62
GLOSSARY
ACTD
AP
ARTEP
Advanced Concept Technology Demonstration
ammunition point
Army Training and Evaluation Program
BLPS
ballistic laser eye protection system
CAS
CATD
CC
CP
CW
C4
close air support
Combined Arms and Training Directorate
control channel
command post
chemical warfare
composition 4 explosive
DBBL
DOT
Dismounted Battlespace Battle Lab
Directorate of Operations and Training
ECT
EOD
explosive cutting tape
explosive ordnance disposal
FLSC*
FM
FO
FRAGO
flexible linear shaped charge
frequency modulation
forward observer
fragmentary order
HC
HEDP
HYDRA-RAM
hydrogen chloride
high-explosive, dual-purpose
hydraulic breaching device
IAW
ID
IR
in accordance with
identification
infrared
kph
kilometer per hour
LAW
LBE
LCD
LCE
LOS
light antitank weapon
load-bearing equipment (current terminology = LCE)
liquid crystal display
load-carrying equipment
line of sight
MDI
METT-T
MILES
MOPP
modernized demolition initiator
mission, enemy, terrain, troops, and time available
multiple-integrated laser engagement system
mission-oriented protective posture
_____________________________________________________________________________
Glossary-1
MOUT
MQS
MSD
MTP
military operations on urbanized terrain
Military Qualification Standards
minimum safe distance
mission training plan
NBC
NLOS
NLT
NOD
NTF
NVG
nuclear, biological, chemical
non-line-of-sight
not later than
night observation device
National Test Facility
night vision goggles
OP
OPFOR
OPORD
observation post
opposing forces
operation order
PL
PSI
PTT
phase line
pounds per square inch
push to talk
RF
RLEM*
ROE
radio frequency
rifle launched entry munitions
Rules of Engagement
SAW
SOI
SOP
SPECS
squad assault weapon
signal operation instructions
standard operating procedures
special protective eyewear cylindrical system
T&EO
TO&E
TEA
TOW
TPT
TTP
training and evaluation outline
table of organization and equipment
Triethyl Aluminum
tube-launched, optically-tracked, wire-guided
tactical petroleum terminal
tactics, techniques, and procedures
UAV
UGV
USAISC
unmanned aerial vehicle
unmanned ground vehicle
U. S. Army Infantry School and Center
WP
white phosphorous
_____________________________________________________________________________
Glossary-2

MOUT ACTD

Transcription

Similar documents

BattleNet 360 - Delex Systems, Inc

Sportsmaster Brochure

63rd Gallon Mike Dapiran, Brian May, Richard Pospesel, Bert

TruPay HR Forum.cdr

bcmgunfighter 1911

Model - Omega Juicers

Pepsi Cola

Transit | City of Fredericton

The Trim Tab - IPMS